1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Camera User Guide
ENGLISH
©CANON INC. 2013 CDD-E552-020
• Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
• To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter
title at right.
From chapter title pages, you can access topics by
clicking their titles.
• Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety
Precautions” section (=
8), before using the camera.
• Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera
properly.
• Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the
future.
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera Battery Pack
NB-10L
(with terminal cover)
Battery Charger
CB-2LC/CB-2LCE
Neck Strap Getting Started Warranty Card
•A memory card is not included (=
2).
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
• SD memory cards*
1
• SDHC memory cards*
1
*
2
• SDXC memory cards*
1
*
2
*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
veriedtoworkwiththecamera.
*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
Preliminary Notes and Legal
Information
• Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images were
recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries and
afliates,anditsdistributorsarenotliableforanyconsequentialdamages
arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory, including memory
cards, that result in the failure of an image to be recorded or to be
recorded in a way that is machine readable.
• Images recorded by the camera are intended for personal use. Refrain
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note that
even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright or other
legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some commercial
settings.
• The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
• AlthoughtheLCDmonitorandviewnderareproducedunderextremely
high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the
pixelsmeetdesignspecications,inrarecasessomepixelsmaybe
defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate
camera damage or affect recorded images.
• TheLCDmonitormaybecoveredwithathinplasticlmforprotection
againstscratchesduringshipment.Ifcovered,removethelmbefore
using the camera.
• When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become warm.
This does not indicate damage.
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Part Names and Conventions in This
Guide
Front dial
Lamp
Lens
Zoom lever
Shooting: <i (telephoto)> /
<j (wide angle)>
Playback: <k (magnify)> /
<g (index)>
Strap mount
Shutter button
Power button/lamp
Mode dial
Hot shoe
< (Flash up)> switch
Flash
Speaker
Ring release button
DC coupler cable port
Memory card/battery cover
Tripod socket
• Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in brackets.
•
: Important information you should know
•
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
• =xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents a
page number)
• Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
• For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
• The tabs shown above titles indicate whether the function is used for still
images, movies, or both.
Still Images
: Indicates that the function is used when shooting or
viewing still images.
Movies
: Indicates that the function is used when shooting or
viewing movies.
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Wi-Fi antenna area
< (Shortcut)> button
<+ (AE lock/FE lock)> /
<
(Filtering image display)>
button
< (ISO speed)> /
<a (Single-image erase)> button
Screen (LCD monitor)
Diopter adjustment dial
Viewnder
Microphone
Indicator
Exposure compensation dial
<1 (Playback)> button
Movie button
Remote terminal
AV OUT (Audio/video output) /
DIGITAL terminal
HDMI
TM
terminal
<n> button
< (AF frame selector)> /
<
(Wi-Fi)> button
<f (Manual focus)> / Up button
<e (Macro)> / Left button
Control dial
FUNC./SET button
<h (Flash)> / Right button
<l (Display)> / Down button
Turning the control dial is one way to
choose setting items, switch images, and
perform other operations. Most of these
operations are also possible with the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
• In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
• The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
<7> Control dial
on back <q> Left button on back
<z> Front dial
on front <r> Right button on back
<o> Up button
on back <p> Down button on back
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
5 Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2
Mode .....................................91
Specic Shutter Speeds
([Tv] Mode)...................................92
Specic Aperture Values
([Av] Mode) ..................................93
Specic Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values ([M] Mode) .........93
Customization for Shooting
Styles ...........................................95
Customizing the FUNC. Menu
(FUNC. Menu Layout) ..................98
6 Playback Mode ..................101
Viewing ......................................102
Browsing and Filtering Images ..105
Editing Face ID Information .......108
Image Viewing Options ..............109
Protecting Images ...................... 111
Erasing Images ..........................114
Rotating Images ......................... 116
Tagging Images as Favorites ..... 117
Convenient Control
Using the <
> Button..............118
Editing Still Images .................... 118
Editing Movies............................122
7 Wi-Fi Functions .................124
What You Can Do with Wi-Fi .....125
Preparing to Share Images via
Wi-Fi...........................................126
Registering Web Services ..........127
Installing CameraWindow on a
Smartphone ...............................130
Preparing to Register a
Computer ...................................131
Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu .........133
Connecting via an Access
Point ...........................................134
Connecting without an
Access Point ..............................139
Connecting to Another
Camera ......................................141
Sending Images .........................142
Saving Images to a Computer ...144
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)..............................145
Geotagging Images on the
Camera ......................................146
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi
Settings ......................................147
8 Setting Menu ......................149
Adjusting Basic Camera
Functions ...................................150
9 Accessories .......................158
System Map ...............................159
Optional Accessories .................160
Using Optional Accessories .......163
Using the Software ....................173
Printing Images ..........................176
Table of Contents
Package Contents .........................2
Compatible Memory Cards ............2
Preliminary Notes and Legal
Information .....................................2
Part Names and Conventions
in This Guide ..................................3
Table of Contents ...........................5
Common Camera Operations ........7
Safety Precautions .........................8
Basic Guide .................... 11
Initial Preparations .......................12
Trying the Camera Out ................16
Advanced Guide ............. 20
1 Camera Basics .....................20
On/Off ..........................................21
Shutter Button ..............................22
Optical Viewnder ........................22
Shooting Modes ...........................23
Shooting Display Options ............23
Using the FUNC. Menu ................24
Using Menus ................................25
On-Screen Keyboard ...................26
Indicator Display ..........................27
Clock ............................................27
2 Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode ................ 28
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings ........................................29
Common, Convenient Features ...35
Using Face ID ..............................39
Image Customization Features ....44
Helpful Shooting Features ...........47
Customizing Camera Operation ..48
3 Other Shooting Modes ........51
Specic Scenes ...........................52
Image Effects (Creative Filters) ...54
Special Modes for Other
Purposes ......................................60
Shooting Various Movies .............65
4 P Mode ..................................67
Shooting in Program AE
([P] Mode) ....................................68
Image Brightness (Exposure) ......68
Color and Continuous Shooting ...74
Shooting Range and Focusing ....77
Flash ............................................85
Shooting RAW Images .................88
Other Settings ..............................89
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
10 Appendix ............................184
Troubleshooting .........................185
On-Screen Messages ................188
On-Screen Information ..............191
Functions and Menu Tables .......193
Handling Precautions ................. 203
Specications ............................. 203
Index ..........................................207
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Precautions ................................210
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Common Camera Operations
4 Shoot
Use camera-determined settings
(Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode) .....................................................29, 31
Shooting people well
I
Portraits
(=
52)
P
Against Snow
(=
52)
Matchingspecicscenes
Night Scenes
(=
52)
S
Under Water
(=
52)
t
Fireworks
(=
53)
Starry Skies
(=
62)
Applying special effects
Vivid Colors
(=
54)
Poster Effect
(=
55)
“Aged” Photos
(=
56)
Fish-Eye Effect
(=
56)
Miniature Effect
(=
57)
Toy Camera Effect
(=
58)
Background Defocus
(=
58)
Soft Focus
(=
59)
Monochrome
(=
59)
Focus on faces ...................................................................29, 52, 82, 84
Withoutusingtheash(FlashOff) .................................................29, 86
Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer) ........................................36, 61
Add a date stamp .................................................................................38
Use Face ID ................................................................................. 39, 105
Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest) .................................. 31
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
1 View
View images (Playback Mode) ...........................................................102
Automatic playback (Slideshow) .........................................................110
On a TV ..............................................................................................163
On a computer ...................................................................................174
Browsethroughimagesquickly .........................................................105
Erase images ......................................................................................114
E Shoot/View Movies
Shoot movies .................................................................................29, 65
View movies (Playback Mode) ...........................................................102
Fast-moving subjects, slow-motion playback .......................................66
c Print
Print pictures ...................................................................................... 176
Save
Save images to a computer via a cable ............................................. 174
Use Wi-Fi Functions
Send images to a smartphone ........................................................... 126
Share images online ..........................................................................127
Send images to a computer ............................................................... 145
Safety Precautions
• Before using the product, please ensure that you read the safety
precautions described below. Always ensure that the product is used
correctly.
• The safety precautions noted on the following pages are intended
to prevent injuries to yourself and other persons, or damage to the
equipment.
• Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
• Donottriggertheashincloseproximitytopeople’seyes.
Exposuretotheintenselightproducedbytheashcoulddamageeyesight.
In particular, remain at least 1 meter (39 inches) away from infants when
usingtheash.
• Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
Strap: Putting the strap around a child’s neck could result in asphyxiation.
Date/time battery (if removable): Dangerous if swallowed. If this occurs,
contact a doctor immediately.
• Use only recommended power sources.
• Do not attempt to disassemble, alter or apply heat to the product.
• Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
• To avoid the risk of injury, do not touch the interior of the product if
it has been dropped or otherwise damaged.
• Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke, a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
• Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
• Do not let the product come into contact with water (e.g. sea water)
or other liquids.
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• Do not allow liquids or foreign objects to enter the camera.
Thiscouldresultinelectricalshockorre.
Ifliquidsorforeignobjectscomeintocontactwiththecamerainterior,
immediately turn the camera off and remove the battery pack/batteries.
If the battery charger (for cameras that use one) becomes wet, unplug
it from the outlet and consult your camera retailer or a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
• Donotlookthroughtheviewnder(ifyourmodelhasone)atbright
light sources, such as the sun on a clear day.
This could damage your eyesight.
• Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
• Donotplacethebatterypack/batteriesnearorindirectame.
• If your camera uses a battery charger, note the following
precautions.
- Unplug the power cord periodically, and using a dry cloth, wipe
away any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior
of the power outlet, and the surrounding area.
- Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the power cord or plug are damaged, or not fully plugged into the
outlet.
- Do not allow dirt or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
The battery pack/batteries may explode or leak, resulting in electrical shock
orre.Thiscouldcauseinjuryanddamagethesurroundings.Intheevent
that a battery pack leaks and the battery electrolyte contacts eyes, mouth,
skinorclothing,immediatelyushwithwater.
• Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operationofelectronicinstrumentsandotherdevices.Exerciseadequate
caution when using the camera in places where use of electronic devices is
restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
• When holding the camera by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
• Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
• Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
• Whenusingtheash,becarefulnottocoveritwithyourngersor
clothing.
Thiscouldresultinburnsordamagetotheash.
• Avoid using, placing or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty areas
These could cause leakage, overheating or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries,resultinginelectricalshock,re,burnsorotherinjuries.
High temperatures may deform the product.
• The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
• Whenusingoptionallenses,lenslters,orlteradapters(if
applicable),besuretoattachtheseaccessoriesrmly.
If the lens becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the shards of glass
may lead to cuts.
• Oncamerasthatraiseandlowertheashautomatically,makesure
yourngerisoutofthewaywhentheashislowered,toavoid
pinching it.
This could result in injury.
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Caution
Denotesthepossibilityofdamagetotheequipment.
• Do not aim the camera at bright light sources (such as the sun on a
clear day).
Doing so may damage the image sensor.
• When using the camera on a beach or at a windy location, be careful
not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
• Oncamerasthatraiseandlowertheashautomatically,donotpush
theashdownorpryitopen.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
• In regular use, small amounts of smoke may be emitted from the
ash.
Thisisduetothehighintensityoftheashburningdustandforeign
materials stuck to the front of the unit. Please use a cotton swab to remove
dirt,dustorotherforeignmatterfromtheashtopreventheatbuild-upand
damage to the unit.
• Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the camera.
If the battery pack or batteries are left inside the camera, damage caused
by leakage may occur.
• Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals
with tape or other insulators.
Contactingothermetalmaterialsmayleadtoreorexplosions.
• If your camera is used with a battery charger, keep the charger
unplugged when not in use. When charging the battery pack, do not
leave it covered with a cloth or put other objects on it.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheatanddistort,resultinginre.
• Do not leave the battery pack near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating or explosion,
resultinginreordamage.
• If your camera uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that have
different levels of charge together, do not use old and new batteries
together, and do not insert the batteries with the + and – terminals
reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
• Do not sit down with the camera in your pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
• When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do
not come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that
it faces the camera body), if your camera has a screen that closes.
• Do not attach any hard objects to the camera.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Basic Guide
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting and
playback
Initial Preparations ...........................................12
Attaching the Strap ................................................12
Holding the Camera ..............................................12
Charging the Battery Pack ....................................12
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card .......13
Setting the Date and Time .....................................14
Display Language .................................................16
Trying the Camera Out .....................................16
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...........................................16
Viewing ..................................................................18
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching the Strap
Attach the included strap to the camera
as shown.
On the other side of the camera, attach
the strap the same way.
Holding the Camera
Place the strap around your neck.
When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raisedtheash,donotrestyourngers
on it.
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1 Insert the battery pack.
Remove the cover from the battery, align
the marks on the battery and charger,
and insert the battery by pushing it in (
)
and down (
).
2 Charge the battery pack.
CB-2LC: Flip out the plug ( ) and plug
the charger into a power outlet (
).
CB-2LCE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
The charging lamp turns orange and
charging begins.
Whenchargingisnished,thelampturns
green.
3 Remove the battery pack.
After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(
) and up ( ).
CB-2LC
CB-2LCE
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
• For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the
charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction
or damage to the product.
• For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time
possible with a fully charged battery pack, see “Number of Shots/Recording
Time, Playback Time” (=
204).
• Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when they are not
used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately before) the day of use. As a
visual reminder of the charging status, attach the battery cover with visible
on a charged battery pack and concealed on an uncharged one.
• The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). For
power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for
the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may
damage the battery pack.
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted
in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera
(=
153).
1 Checkthecard’swrite-protect
tab.
Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect tab when the
tab is in the locked (downward) position.
Slide the tab up until it clicks into the
unlocked position.
2 Open the cover.
Slide the cover ( ) and open it ( ).
3 Insert the battery pack.
While pressing the battery lock in the
direction of the arrow, insert the battery
pack as shown and push it in until it clicks
into the locked position.
If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correctposition.Alwaysconrmthatthe
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
4 Insert the memory card.
Insert the memory card facing as shown
until it clicks into the locked position.
Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
Terminals Battery
Lock
Label
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
5 Close the cover.
Lower the cover ( ) and hold it down as
you slide it, until it clicks into the closed
position (
).
• For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be saved on one
memory card, see “Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” (=
204).
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
The battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
The memory card will pop up.
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this way
is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when you
manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
You can also add a date stamp to shots, if you wish (=
38).
1 Turn the camera on.
Press the power button.
The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
2 Set the date and time.
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose an
option.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to specify the date and time.
Whennished,pressthe<m> button.
3 Set the home time zone.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose your home time zone.
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
4 Finish the setup process.
Press the <m>buttonwhennished.
Afteraconrmationmessage,thesetting
screen is no longer displayed.
To turn off the camera, press the power
button.
• Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/Time]
screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on. Specify
the correct information.
• To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2 and then
choose [
] by pressing the <o><p> buttons or turning the <7> dial.
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1 Access the camera menu.
Press the <n> button.
2 Choose [Date/Time].
Move the zoom lever to choose the [3]
tab.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the <m> button.
3 Change the date and time.
Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (=
14) to adjust the settings.
Press the <n> button to close the
menu.
• Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the camera’s built-in
date/time battery (backup battery) after the battery pack is removed.
• The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you insert a
charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit (sold
separately, =
160), even if the camera is left off.
• Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will be
displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date and time as
described in “Setting the Date and Time” (=
14).
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Trying the Camera Out
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Forfullyautomaticselectionoftheoptimalsettingsforspecicscenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1 Turn the camera on.
Press the power button.
The startup screen is displayed.
2 Enter [ ] mode.
Set the mode dial to [ ].
Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1 Enter Playback mode.
Press the <1> button.
2 Access the setting screen.
Press and hold the <m> button, and
then immediately press the <n>
button.
3 Set the display language.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose a language,
and then press the <m> button.
Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
• The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after pressing the
<m> button before you press the <n> button. In this case, press the
<m> button to dismiss the time display and repeat step 2.
• You can also change the display language by pressing the <n> button
and choosing [Language
] on the [3] tab.
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
3 Compose the shot.
To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward <i> (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward <j> (wide angle).
4 Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
Focus.
Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
If[Raisetheash]appearsonthescreen,
move the <
>switchtoraisetheash.
Itwillrewhenshooting.Ifyouprefernot
tousetheash,pushitdownwithyour
nger,intothecamera.
Shoot.
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
whenyouhaveraisedtheash,itres
automatically.
Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Shooting Movies
Start shooting.
Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[
Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time.
Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. These areas
will not be recorded.
Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
Oncerecordingbegins,takeyournger
off the movie button.
Finish shooting.
Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
Elapsed Time
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• You can make a short movie of the day (digest movie) just by shooting still
images. When the mode dial is set to [
], the camera automatically records
a movie clip of the scene immediately before each shot (Hybrid Auto Mode
(=
31)).
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1 Enter Playback mode.
Press the <1> button.
Your last shot is displayed.
2 Browse through your images.
To view the previous image, press
the <q> button or turn the <7> dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the <r> button or turn the
<7> dial clockwise.
Press and hold the <q><r> buttons to
browsethroughimagesquickly.
To access Scroll Display mode, turn the
<7> dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the
<7> dial to browse through images.
To return to single-image display, press
the <m> button.
Moviesareidentiedbya[ ] icon. To
play movies, go to step 3.
3 Play movies.
Press the <m> button to access the
movie control panel, choose [
] (either
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial), and then press the <m>
button again.
Playback now begins, and after the movie
isnished,[
] is displayed.
To adjust the volume, press the <o><p>
buttons.
• To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
halfway.
Volume
19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Erasing the Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1 Choose an image to erase.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
2 Erase the image.
Press the <a> button.
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the <m>
button.
The current image is now erased.
To cancel erasure, press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the <m>
button.
• You can also erase all images at once (=
114).
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
Practical guide that introduces other camera basics and describes shooting and playback
options
On/Off ................................................................21
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ........21
Shutter Button ..................................................22
OpticalViewnder ............................................22
Shooting Modes ............................................... 23
Shooting Display Options ............................... 23
Using the FUNC. Menu ....................................24
Using Menus .....................................................25
On-Screen Keyboard .......................................26
Indicator Display .............................................. 27
Clock .................................................................27
21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
On/Off
Shooting Mode
Press the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
To turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Playback Mode
Press the <1> button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
To turn the camera off, press the <1>
button again.
• To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the <1> button.
• To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
halfway (=
22).
• The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera is in
Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is retracted by
pressing the <1> button.
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
thescreen(DisplayOff)andthenturnsitselfoffafteraspecicperiodof
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity.
In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself
off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off
but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway (=
22).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
Thecameraturnsitselfoffautomaticallyafteraboutveminutesof
inactivity.
• You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of Display Off, if
you prefer (=
152).
• Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other devices via
Wi-Fi (=
124), or when connected to a computer (=
174).
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and AF frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2 Press all the way down. (From
the halfway position, press fully
to shoot.)
The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
• Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the
shutter button halfway.
• Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
requiredfortheshot.Itmaytakelongerinsomeshootingscenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Optical Viewnder
To conserve battery power when shooting, you can use the optical
viewnderinsteadofthescreen.Shootthesamewayaswhenusingthe
screen.
1 Deactivate the screen.
Press the <p> button several times to
turn the screen off (=
23).
2 Adjust the diopter.
As you look through the optical
viewnder,turnthedialonewayorthe
other so that images look sharp.
• Theareavisibleintheopticalviewndermaydifferslightlyfromthe
image area in your shots.
• At aspect ratios other than 4:3, the area visible in the optical
viewnderdiffersfromtheimageareainyourshots.Checkthe
settings before shooting.
• Thelensmaybepartiallyvisiblethroughtheopticalviewnderatsomezoom
positions.
• Although the camera automatically focuses on subjects, face detection and
focusing is not possible.
• Continuous shooting is not supported in [
] mode, because the camera
will not determine the shooting scene.
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
P, Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Modes
Take a variety of
shots using your
preferred settings
(=
67, 91).
Movie Mode
For shooting movies
(=
65).
You can also shoot
movies when the mode
dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing
the movie button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(=
16, 29, 31).
Special Scene Mode
Shoot with optimal settings for
specicscenes(=
52).
Creative Filters Mode
Add a variety of effects to images
when shooting (=
54).
Shooting Display Options
Press the <p> button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “On-Screen
Information” (=
191).
Display 1 Display 2 Display Off
• Even if the screen is off, it will turn on when you start shooting a
movie.
• Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night display function
when you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how shots
are composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not match the
brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image distortion or jerky
subject motion will not affect recorded images.
• For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes” (=
103).
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Using the FUNC. Menu
CongurecommonlyusedshootingfunctionsthroughtheFUNC.menuas
follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(=
195 – 197).
1 Access the FUNC. menu.
Press the <m> button.
2 Choose a menu item.
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose a
menu item.
Available options are shown at the bottom
of the screen.
3 Choose an option.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option.
Options labeled with a [ ] icon can
beconguredbypressingthe<n>
button.
Options labeled with a [ ] icon can be
conguredbypressingthe<
> button.
Options labeled with a [ ] icon can be
conguredbypressingthe<
> button.
Menu Items
Options
4 Finish the setup process.
Press the <m> button.
The screen before you pressed the
<m> button in step 1 is displayed again,
showingtheoptionyoucongured.
• To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default
settings (=
157).
25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Using Menus
Congureavarietyofcamerafunctionsthroughothermenusasfollows.
Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting [4],
playback [1], and so on. Note that available menu items vary depending
on the selected shooting or playback mode (=
198 – 202).
1 Access the menu.
Press the <n> button.
2 Choose a tab.
Move the zoom lever to choose a tab.
After you have pressed the <o><p>
buttons or turned the <7> dial to choose
a tab initially, you can switch between
tabs by pressing the <q><r> buttons.
3 Choose a menu item.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose a menu item.
For menu items with options not shown,
rstpressthe<m> or <r> button to
switch screens, and then either press the
<o><p> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
select the menu item.
To return to the previous screen, press
the <n> button.
4 Choose an option.
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose an
option.
5 Finish the setup process.
Press the <n> button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
<n> button in step 1.
• To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default
settings (=
157).
26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (=
40),
Wi-Fi connections (=
133), and so on. Note that the length and type of
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.
Entering Characters
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose a character,
and then press the <m> button to enter it.
The amount of information you can enter
varies depending on the function you are
using.
Moving the Cursor
Choose [ ] or [ ] and press the <m>
button. Alternatively, turn the <7> dial.
Entering Line Breaks
Choose [ ] and press the <m> button.
Switching Input Modes
To switch to numbers or symbols, choose
[
] and press the <m> button.
To switch between uppercase and
lowercase letters, choose [
] and press
the <m> button.
Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Number of Available Characters
Deleting Characters
To delete the previous character,
choose [
] and press the <m> button.
Alternatively, press the <a> button.
Holding down the <a> button will delete
vecharactersatatime.
ConrmingInputandReturningto
the Previous Screen
Press the <n> button.
27
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Indicator Display
The indicator of the camera (= 3, 4) lights up or blinks depending
on the camera status.
Indicator Color
Indicator
Status
Camera Status
Power Lamp Green On Camera on
Indicator
Green
On Readytoshoot(whentheashisdeactivated)
Blinking
Recording/reading/transmitting images, shooting
long exposures (=
92, 93), distance
warning (=
185), cannot focus (when the
ashisdeactivated)(=
185), or connecting/
transmitting via Wi-Fi
Orange
On Readytoshoot(whentheashisactivated)
Blinking
Distance warning (=
185), or cannot focus
(whentheashisactivated)(=
185)
• When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open the
memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which may
corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
Clock
You can check the current time.
Press and hold the <m> button.
The current time appears.
If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch
to vertical display. Press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to change
the display color.
Press the <m> button again to cancel
the clock display.
• When the camera is off, press and hold the <m> button, then press the power
button to display the clock.
28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting
2
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings ............................................................29
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...........................................29
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ...............................31
Scene Icons ..........................................................33
Image Stabilization Icons ......................................34
On-Screen Frames ................................................35
Common, Convenient Features ......................35
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .....35
Using the Self-Timer..............................................36
Adding a Date Stamp ............................................ 38
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF) .....38
Using Face ID ...................................................39
Registering Face ID Information ...........................39
Shooting ................................................................ 41
Checking and Editing Registered Information .......42
Image Customization Features .......................44
Changing the Aspect Ratio ....................................44
Changing Image Resolution (Size) .......................45
Red-Eye Correction ...............................................45
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury
Lamps ...................................................................46
Changing Movie Image Quality ............................. 46
Helpful Shooting Features ..............................47
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level .....................47
Magnifying the Area in Focus ................................47
Checking for Closed Eyes .....................................48
Customizing Camera Operation .....................48
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam ..........................48
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp ..........49
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots ......49
29
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
3 Compose the shot.
To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward <i> (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward <j> (wide angle). (A zoom bar
showing the zoom position is displayed.)
4 Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
Focus.
Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
AF frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
Several AF frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
If[Raisetheash]appearsonthescreen,
move the <
>switchtoraisetheash.
Itwillrewhenshooting.Ifyouprefernot
tousetheash,pushitdownwithyour
nger,intothecamera.
Zoom Bar
Focus Range (approx.)
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
Forfullyautomaticselectionoftheoptimalsettingsforspecicscenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Still Images Movies
Shooting (Smart Auto)
1 Turn the camera on.
Press the power button.
The startup screen is displayed.
2 Enter [ ] mode.
Set the mode dial to [ ].
Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen (=
33, 34).
Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Shoot.
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
whenyouhaveraisedtheash,itres
automatically.
Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Shooting Movies
Start shooting.
Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[
Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time.
Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. These areas
will not be recorded.
Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
Oncerecordingbegins,takeyournger
off the movie button.
Elapsed Time
Resize the subject and
recompose the shot as needed.
To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3 (=
29).
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded.
When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
Finish shooting.
Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
• Theashringduringshotsindicatesthatthecamerahasautomatically
attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main subject and background (Multi-
area White Balance).
31
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
1 Enter [ ] mode.
Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(=
29) and choose [ ].
2 Compose the shot.
Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (=
29) to compose the shot and
focus.
For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
3 Shoot.
Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(=
29) to shoot a still image.
The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
• Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
• A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ ] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
• Camera operating sounds will be recorded in digest movies.
• Digestmoviequalityis[ ] and cannot be changed.
• Some camera sounds will be muted. Sounds are not played when you press
the shutter button halfway or trigger the self-timer (=
150).
• Digestmoviesaresavedasseparatemovielesinthefollowingcasesevenif
they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- Thedigestmovielesizereachesapproximately4GB,orthetotalrecording
time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20 seconds.
- The digest movie is protected (=
111).
- Daylight saving time (=
15) or time zone (=
151) settings are changed.
- A new folder is created (=
155).
• Recordedshuttersoundscannotbemodiedorerased.
• If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust the setting in
advance. Press the <n> button, and on the [4] tab, set [Digest Type] to
[No Stills] (=
25).
• Individual chapters can be edited (=
123).
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play a digest movie, or specify the
date of the digest movie to play (=
104).
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images/Movies
• To activate the screen when the camera is on but the screen is
blank in [ ] mode, press the <p> button.
• If the camera is turned on while the <p> button is held down, the
camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press the
<n> button and choose [Mute] on the [3] tab, and then press
the <q><r> buttons to choose [Off].
Still Images
• A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred
by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
• Ifyourshotsaredarkdespitetheashring,moveclosertothe
subject.Fordetailsontheashrange,see“FlashRange”(=
205).
• The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when
you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the focusing
range (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (=
205).
• To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be
activated when shooting in low-light conditions.
• A blinking [h] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates
thatshootingisnotpossibleuntiltheashhasnishedrecharging.
Shootingcanresumeassoonastheashisready,soeitherpress
the shutter button all the way down and wait, or release it and press
it again.
• The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and Babies
(Sleeping) icons (=
33) are displayed.
• Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen is
displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus, brightness,
and colors used.
• You can change how long images are displayed after shots (=
49).
Movies
• Keepyourngersawayfromthe
microphone while shooting movies.
Blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may
causetherecordingtosoundmufed.
• Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
• Once movie recording begins, a smaller image display area is
shown, with the subject enlarged, as a measure when correcting
distortion such as rotational camera shake. To shoot subjects at the
same size shown before shooting, adjust the image stabilization
setting (=
89).
• Audio is recorded in stereo.
• Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can be reduced.
However, the recording may sound unnatural when this option is used when
there is no wind. When the wind is not strong, press the <n> button,
choose [Wind Filter] on the [4] tab, and then choose [Off] (=
25).
Microphone
33
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Scene Icons
In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (=
34).
Background
Subject
Normal Backlit Dark* Sunsets Spotlights
People
–
In Motion
– – –
Shadows on Face
– – – –
Smiling
– – –
Sleeping
– – –
Babies
– – –
Smiling
– – –
Sleeping
– – –
Children (In Motion)
– – –
Other Subjects
In Motion
– – –
At Close Range
– –
* Tripod Used
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
•The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue, and the
background color of [
] is orange.
•When shooting movies, only People, Other Subjects, and At Close Range icons will
be displayed.
•When shooting in [
] mode, only People, Shadows on Face, Other Subjects, and At
Close Range icons will be displayed.
•When shooting with the self-timer, People (In Motion), Smiling, Sleeping, Babies
(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), Children, Other Subjects (In Motion) icons will not be
displayed.
•When the drive mode is set to [
] (=
34), and when [Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to
[On] and scenes are automatically corrected (=
46), Smiling, Sleeping, Babies
(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children icons will not be displayed.
•Iftheashissetto[
], the Backlit icons for Smiling and Children will not be
displayed.
•Babies, Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children icons will be displayed
when [Face ID] is set to [On], and the face of a registered baby (under two years old)
or child (from two to twelve years old) is detected (=
39).Conrmbeforehandthat
the date and time are correct (=
14).
• Try shooting in [G] mode (=
67) if the scene icon does not match
actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot with your
expected effect, color, or brightness.
34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Continuous Shooting Scenes
If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed,
the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway
when one of the icons in the table below is displayed, one of the following
icons will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous
images: [ ], [ ], or [W].
Smiling (including Babies)
: Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Sleeping (including Babies)
: Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
TheAFassistbeamwillnotlightup,theashwillnot
re,andtheshuttersoundwillnotbeplayed.
Children
W: So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
• In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
• Focus,imagebrightness,andcoloraredeterminedbytherstshot.
• When you want to shoot single images only, press the <m> button, choose
[
] in the menu, and then select [ ].
Still Images Movies
Image Stabilization Icons
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in [ ]
and [ ] modes.
Image stabilization for still
images
Image stabilization for movies,
reducing strong camera shake,
as when shooting while walking
(Dynamic IS)
Image stabilization for still
images when panning*
Image stabilization for slow
camera shake, such as when
shooting movies at telephoto
(Powered IS)
Image stabilization for macro
shots (Hybrid IS)
No image stabilization, because
the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other
means
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you follow
subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera
shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects moving
vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake.
• To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (=
89). In this case, an
IS icon is not displayed.
• In [
] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed.
35
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
On-Screen Frames
In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects
subjects you are aiming the camera at.
• A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus.
However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white frame
will remain on the screen.
• When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus and
image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
• Try shooting in [G] mode (=
67) if no frames are displayed, if
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
Common, Convenient Features
Still Images Movies
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 20x enlargement.
1 Move the zoom lever toward
<i>.
Hold the lever until zooming stops.
Zooming stops at the largest possible
zoom factor (before the image becomes
noticeably grainy), which is then indicated
on the screen.
2 Move the zoom lever toward
<i> again.
The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
Zoom Factor
36
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change depending
on the zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not appear
grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not noticeably
grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy.
Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution
settings (=
45), the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by
following step 1.
• Focal length when optical and digital zoom are combined is as follows (35mm
lm equivalent).
28 – 560 mm (28 – 140 mm with optical zoom alone)
• To deactivate digital zoom, press the <n> button, choose [Digital Zoom]
on the [4] tab, and then choose [Off].
Still Images Movies
Using the Self-Timer
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other timed
shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter
button.
1 Congurethesetting.
Press the <m> button, choose [ ]
in the menu, and then choose the []]
option (=
24).
Once the setting is complete, []] is
displayed.
2 Shoot.
For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
For Movies: Press the movie button.
37
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remainlitincasetheashres.)
To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
<n> button.
To restore the original setting, choose
[
] in step 1.
Still Images Movies
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you have
pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing
the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
36) and choose [[].
Once the setting is complete, [[] is
displayed.
Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
36) to shoot.
Still Images Movies
Customizing the Self-Timer
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1 Choose [$].
Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
36), choose [$] and press the
<
> button.
2 Congurethesetting.
Turn the <z> dial to choose the [Delay]
time, either press the <q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose the number
of [Shots], and then press the <m>
button.
Once the setting is complete, [$] is
displayed.
Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
36) to shoot.
• For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay
before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.
• When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white balance are
determinedbytherstshot.Moretimeisrequiredbetweenshotswhenthe
ashresorwhenyouhavespeciedtotakemanyshots.Shootingwillstop
automatically when the memory card becomes full.
• Whenadelaylongerthantwosecondsisspecied,twosecondsbeforethe
shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remainlitincasetheashres.)
38
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Adding a Date Stamp
The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-right corner.
However,notethatdatestampscannotbeeditedorremoved,soconrm
beforehand that the date and time are correct (=
14).
1 Congurethesetting.
Press the <n> button, choose [Date
Stamp
] on the [4] tab, and then
choose the desired option (=
25).
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
2 Shoot.
As you take shots, the camera adds the
shooting date or time to the lower-right
corner of images.
To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
• Date stamps cannot be edited or removed.
• Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one as follows.
However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already have one may
cause it to be printed twice.
- Print using printer functions (=
176)
- Use camera DPOF print settings (=
180) to print
- Use the software downloaded from the Canon website to print (=
173)
Still Images Movies
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
In [AUTO] mode, shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.
1 Specify Tracking AF.
Press the <o> button.
[ ] is displayed in the center of the
screen.
2 Choose a subject to focus on.
Aim the camera so that [ ] is on the
desired subject, and then press the
shutter button halfway.
A blue frame is displayed, and the
camera will keep the subject in focus and
image brightness adjusted (Servo AF).
3 Shoot.
Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Press the <
o
> button to cancel Tracking AF.
• Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move too rapidly,
or when subject color or brightness matches that of the background too closely.
39
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Using Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children based
on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when shooting.
Thisfunctionisalsousefulwhensearchingforaspecicregisteredperson
among a large number of images (=
106).
Personal Information
• Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with Face ID,
and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved on the camera.
Additionally, when registered people are detected, their names will be
recorded in still images. When using the Face ID function, be careful
when sharing the camera or images with others, and when posting
images online where many others can view them.
• When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces, names,
and birthdays) from the camera (=
44).
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
1 Access the setting screen.
Press the <n> button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [4] tab, and then
press the <m> button (=
25).
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add to Registry],
and then press the <m> button.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add a New Face],
and then press the <m> button.
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
2 Register face information.
Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
After [Register?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
The[EditProle]screenisdisplayed.
3 Registertheperson’snameand
birthday.
Press the <m> button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(=
26).
Toregisterabirthday,onthe[EditProle]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <7>
dial), and then press the <m> button.
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose an
option.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to specify the date.
Whennished,pressthe<m> button.
4 Save the settings.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Save], and then
press the <m> button.
After a message is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the <m>
button.
5 Continue registering face
information.
To register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
41
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• Theashwillnotrewhenfollowingstep2.
• If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
(=
33) will not be displayed in [ ] mode.
• You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if you have not
lledall5faceinfoslots(=
43).
Shooting
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that person
as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for that
person when shooting.
When you point the camera toward a
subject, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected.
Shoot.
Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. Even if people are detected, but
their names are not displayed, the names
(up to 5 people) will be recorded in the
image.
• People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected as
the registered person if they share similar facial features.
• Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured image or
scene differs drastically from the registered face information.
• If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected, overwrite registered
information with new face info. Registering face info right before shooting will
allow for easier detection of registered faces.
• If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you continue
shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the image during
playback (=
108).
• Becausefacesofbabiesandchildrenchangequicklyastheygrow,youshould
update their face info regularly (=
43).
• When the screen is set to off (=
23), names for detected faces are not
displayed, but they will be recorded with images.
• Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the [Shooting Info]
check box in [Custom Display] (=
95) on the [4] tab so that the names are
not displayed.
• If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose [Face ID
Settings] on the [4] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose [Off].
• You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen (simple
information display) (=
103).
• In [
] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen, but they will be
recorded in still images.
42
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Checking and Editing Registered Information
1 Access the [Check/Edit Info]
screen.
Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (=
39), choose [Check/
Edit Info] and press the <m> button.
2 Choose a person to check or
edit.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose the person to
check or edit, and then press the <m>
button.
3 Check or edit the information as
needed.
To check a name or birthday, access
the[EditProle]screenbypressingthe
<o><p> buttons or turning the <7>
dial and then pressing the <m> button.
On the screen displayed, you can edit
names or birthdays as described in step
3 of “Registering Face ID Information”
(=
40).
To check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the <o><p>
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button. Press the <m>
button on the screen displayed, choose
face information to erase by pressing the
<o><p><q><r> buttons or turning
the <7> dial, and then the <m> button.
After [Erase?] is displayed, choose [OK]
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
• Evenifyouchangenamesin[EditProle],thenamesrecordedin
previously shot images will remain the same.
• You can use the software to edit registered names. Some characters entered
with the software may not display on the camera, but will be correctly recorded
in images.
43
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as
theirfaceschangequicklyastheygrow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been
lled.
1 Access the [Add Face Info]
screen.
Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (=
39), choose [Add Face
Info] and press the <m> button.
2 Choose the name of the person
whose face info you want to
overwrite.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose the name
of a person whose face info you want
to overwrite, and then press the <m>
button.
Ifveitemsoffaceinfohavealready
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial),
and then press the <m> button.
Iflessthanveitemsoffaceinfoare
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
3 Choose the face info to
overwrite.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose the face info
to overwrite, and then press the <m>
button.
4 Register face information.
Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (=
40) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
• Youcannotaddfaceinformationifall5informationslotsarelled.Followthe
steps above to overwrite face information.
• You can follow the above steps to register new face info when there is at least
one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite any face information. Instead
ofoverwritingfaceinfo,rsteraseunwantedexistinginfo(=
42), and then
register new face information (=
39) as needed.
44
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to Face
ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be erased.
1 Access the [Erase Info] screen.
Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (=
39) and choose [Erase
Info].
2 Choose the name of the person
whose info you want to erase.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose the name
of a person to erase, and then press the
<m> button.
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
• If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (=
105), overwrite their info (=
108), or
search images for them (=
107).
• You can also erase names in image information (=
109).
Image Customization Features
Still Images
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
Press the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(=
24).
Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Sameaspectratioas35mmlm,usedforprintingimagesat5x7-inchor
postcard sizes.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, also used for display on standard-
denitiontelevisionsorsimilardisplaydevices,orforprintingimagesat3.5x
5-inch or A-series sizes.
Squareaspectratio.
Aspect ratio commonly used for portraits.
• Not available in [
] mode.
45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Changing Image Resolution (Size)
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on
howmanyshotsateachresolutionsettingcantonamemorycard,see
“Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” (=
204).
Press the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(=
24).
Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper
Size (for 4:3 Images)
[ ]: For e-mailing images.
• Not available in [ ] mode.
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 – A5 (11.7 x
16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
5 x 7 in.
Postcard
3.5 x 5 in.
Still Images
Red-Eye Correction
Red-eyethatoccursinashphotographycanbeautomaticallycorrectedas
follows.
1 Access the [Built-in Flash
Settings] screen.
Press the <n> button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [4] tab, and then press
the <m> button (=
25).
2 Congurethesetting.
Choose [Red-Eye Corr.], and then
choose [On] (=
25).
Once the setting is complete, [R] is
displayed.
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
• Red-eye correction may be applied to image areas other than eyes
(if the camera misinterprets red eye makeup as red pupils, for
example).
46
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• You can also correct existing images (=
121).
• You can also access the screen in step 2 by holding down the <r> button for
at least one second.
• Youcanalsoaccessthescreeninstep2whentheashisupbypressingthe
<r> button and immediately pressing the <n> button.
Still Images
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from
Mercury Lamps
In [ ] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-
area White Balance.
Press the <n> button, choose [Hg
Lamp Corr.] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [On] (=
25).
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
• Afteryouarenishedshootingundermercurylamps,youshouldset
[Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not caused by
mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.
• Trytakingsometestshotsrsttomakesureyouobtainthedesiredresults.
Movies
Changing Movie Image Quality
4imagequalitysettingsareavailable.Forguidelinesonthemaximum
movielengthateachlevelofimagequalitythatwilltonamemorycard,
see “Recording Time per Memory Card” (=
205).
Press the <m> button, choose [ ]
in the menu, and choose the desired
option (=
24).
Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Image
Quality
Resolution Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080* 60 fps
For shooting in Full HD
[
] enables movies
with smoother motion
1920 x 1080* 30 fps
1280 x 720 30 fps For shooting in HD
640 x 480 30 fps
For shooting in standard
denition
* FineDetailMovieProcessing(Thisfunctionquicklyprocessesalargeamountof
information,makingitpossibletorecordevennerdetailsinmovies.)
• In [
], [ ], and [ ] modes, black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded.
47
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Helpful Shooting Features
Still Images Movies
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level
An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera is
level from front to back and left to right.
1 Display the electronic level.
Press the <p> button several times to
display the electronic level.
2 Straighten the camera.
If the camera is tilted, move it so that the
red line changes to green.
• If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the <n> button, and
on the [4] tab, choose [Custom Display]. Add a [
] to [ ] or [ ] to choose
the electronic level.
• The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
• If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic level will be
updated automatically to match the camera orientation.
• Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera (=
155).
Back or
Forward
Left or Right
Still Images
Magnifying the Area in Focus
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.
1 Congurethesetting.
Press the <n> button, choose [AF-
Point Zoom] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [On] (=
25).
2 Check the focus.
Press the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnied.
To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
• Theareainfocuswillnotbemagniedwhenyoupresstheshutter
button halfway if a face was not detected, if the person is too close
to the camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement.
48
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• The display will not magnify when using the digital zoom (=
35), Tracking
AF (=
82), or when using a TV as a display (=
163).
• Not available in [
] mode.
Still Images
Checking for Closed Eyes
[ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
their eyes.
1 Congurethesetting.
Press the <n> button, choose [Blink
Detection] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [On] (=
25).
2 Shoot.
[ ]asheswhenthecameradetectsa
person whose eyes are closed.
To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
• Whenyouhavespeciedmultipleshotsin[$] mode, this function is only
availableforthenalshot.
• A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when you have
selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display Time] (=
49).
• This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [
] mode
(=
76).
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the MENU [4] tab as follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using Menus” (=
25).
Still Images
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus when
you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
Press the <n> button, choose [AF-
assist Beam] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [Off] (=
25).
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
49
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1 Access the [Review image after
shooting] screen.
Press the <n> button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
[4] tab, and then press the <m> button
(=
25).
2 Congurethesetting.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <7> dial to choose [Display Time].
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose the
desired option.
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again.
2 sec., 4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displaysimagesforthespeciedtime.Evenwhiletheshotisdisplayed,
you can take another shot by pressing the shutter button halfway again.
Hold Displays images until you press the shutter button halfway.
Off No image display after shots.
Still Images
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce red-
eyewhentheashisusedinlow-lightshots.
1 Access the [Built-in Flash
Settings] screen.
Press the <n> button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [4] tab, and then press
the <m> button (=
25).
2 Congurethesetting.
Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Off] (=
25).
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
1 Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold]
(=
49).
2 Congurethesetting.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Display Info]. Press
the <q><r> buttons to choose the
desired option.
To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Off Displays only the image.
Detailed
Displays shooting details (=
192).
• When [Display Time] (=
49) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display Info] is set to
[Off] and cannot be changed.
• By pressing the <p> button while an image is displayed after shooting, you
can switch the display information. Note that the settings of [Display Info] are
not changed. You can also delete the image, by pressing the <a> button.
51
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with unique image effects or
captured using special functions
3
Specic Scenes ................................................52
Image Effects (Creative Filters) ......................54
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range) ..........................................55
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic) ................56
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect) ...................................................56
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect) ................................................... 57
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect) ..............................................58
Making Subjects Stand Out
(Background Defocus) ..........................................58
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect .........................59
Shooting in Monochrome ......................................59
Special Modes for Other Purposes ................60
Auto Shooting after Face Detection
(Smart Shutter) ......................................................60
Shooting Starry Skies (Star) ..................................62
Shooting Various Movies ................................65
Shooting Movies in [E] Mode ..............................65
Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies ....................66
52
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automaticallycongurethesettingsforoptimalshots.
1 Enter [K] mode.
Set the mode dial to [K].
2 Choose a shooting mode.
Press the <m> button, choose [I] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(=
24).
3 Shoot.
Still Images Movies
I Shoot portraits (Portrait)
Take shots of people with a softening
effect.
Still Images
Shoot evening scenes without
using a tripod (Handheld
NightScene)
Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Still Images Movies
S Shoot underwater (Underwater)
Natural-colored shots of sea life and
underwater scenery, when you use an
optional waterproof case (=
162).
This mode can correct white balance and
match the effect of using a commercially
availablecolor-compensatinglter
(=
74).
Still Images Movies
P Shoot with snowy backgrounds
(Snow)
Bright, natural-colored shots of people
against snowy backgrounds.
53
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
t Shootreworks(Fireworks)
Vividshotsofreworks.
• Subjects appear larger in [
] mode compared to other modes.
• In [ ] and [S] modes, shots may look grainy because the ISO
speed (=
70) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
• Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
• In [ ] mode, excessive camera shake or certain shooting
conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
• In [t] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures
to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should
set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (=
89).
• When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ] mode instead
of [
] mode will give better results (=
29).
• In [t] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
Still Images
Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range
Iffocusingisdifcultin[S] mode (=
52) with a focus range of [ ],
using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal
underwater shots.
1 Congurethesetting.
Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(=
52) and choose [S].
Press the <q> button, choose the desired
focus range (either press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button.
2 Shoot.
Focusing Range Description
Underwater
Macro
Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom for even closer
shots.
8
Quick
Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting opportunities
when shooting subjects some distance away. Especially effective
for moving subjects.
Refer to “Shooting Range” (=
205) for details on the range of each focus
range.
54
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle.
• In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear
grainy at some resolutions (=
45).
• In [8] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus. In this
case, try setting the focus range to [ ].
• [ ] and [8] are not available in [Tracking AF] AF frame mode (=
38).
Image Effects (Creative Filters)
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
1 Enter [ ] mode.
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Choose a shooting mode.
Press the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose a shooting
mode (=
24).
3 Shoot.
Still Images Movies
Shoot in vivid colors
(Super Vivid)
Shots in rich, vivid colors.
55
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Posterized shots (Poster Effect)
Shots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
• In [ ] and [ ]modes,trytakingsometestshotsrst,tomakesure
you obtain the desired results.
Still Images
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-out
highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tends to occur in high-contrast
shots.
1 Choose [ ].
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
54) and choose
[
].
2 Shoot.
Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
• Excessive camera shake or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
• If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount the camera on
a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally, you should set
[IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera
(=
89).
• Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
and combines the images.
Adding Artistic Effects
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
54) and choose
[
].
Press the < > button, choose an effect
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <
>
button again.
Natural Images are natural and organic.
Art Standard Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Art Embossed Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and dark ambiance.
56
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)
This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old
photographs.Choosefromveeffectlevels.
1 Choose [ ].
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
54) and choose
[
].
2 Choose an effect level.
Turn the <z> dial to choose an effect
level.
A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
• Trytakingsometestshotsrst,tomakesureyouobtainthedesired
results.
• Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging effect is not
shown. Review the image in Playback mode to see the effect (=
102).
• The image aging effect is not shown in movies.
Still Images
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Shootwiththedistortingeffectofash-eyelens.
1 Choose [ ].
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
54) and choose
[
].
2 Choose an effect level.
Turn the <z> dial to choose an effect
level.
A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
• Trytakingsometestshotsrst,tomakesureyouobtainthedesired
results.
57
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and
below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objectsinthescenewillmovequicklyduringplayback.Notethatsoundis
not recorded.
1 Choose [ ].
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
54) and choose
[
].
A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2 Choose the area to keep in focus.
Press the < > button.
Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and turn the <7> dial to move it.
3 For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
Turn the <z> dial to choose the speed.
4 Return to the shooting screen
and shoot.
Press the < > button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
• The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set the
zoom before shooting.
• Trytakingsometestshotsrst,tomakesureyouobtainthedesired
results.
• To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the <q><r> buttons
in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the <o><p>
buttons.
• Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the frame.
• Movieimagequalityis[
] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at an aspect
ratio of [
] (=
44).Thesequalitysettingscannotbechanged.
58
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1 Choose [ ].
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
54) and choose
[
].
2 Choose a color tone.
Turn the <z> dial to choose a color
tone.
A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
• Trytakingsometestshotsrst,tomakesureyouobtainthedesired
results.
Still Images
Making Subjects Stand Out
(Background Defocus)
Two consecutive images are captured each time you shoot and processed
into a single image, so that the subject stands out against a blurred
background.
1 Choose [ ].
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
54) and choose
[
].
2 Shoot.
Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all the
way down, the camera will shoot twice
and process the images.
A blinking [ ] icon indicates that the
images could not be processed.
• Excessive camera shake or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
• For the best results with this effect, try shooting close to the subject, and
ensure ample distance between the subject and background.
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
the images.
• To adjust the effect level, turn the <z> dial.
59
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoshootimagesasifasoftfocuslterwere
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1 Choose [ ].
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
54) and choose
[
].
2 Choose an effect level.
Turn the <z> dial to choose an effect
level.
A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
• Trytakingsometestshotsrst,tomakesureyouobtainthedesired
results.
Still Images Movies
Shooting in Monochrome
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
1 Choose [ ].
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
54) and choose
[
].
2 Choose a color tone.
Turn the <z> dial to choose a color
tone.
A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
B/W Black and white shots.
Sepia Sepia tone shots.
Blue Blue and white shots.
60
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Still Images
Auto Shooting after Face Detection
(Smart Shutter)
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.
1 Choose [ ].
Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(=
52) and choose [ ], and then
press the <
> button.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [
], and then press
the <
> button.
The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is
displayed.
2 Aim the camera at a person.
Each time the camera detects a smile, it
will shoot after the lamp lights up.
To pause smile detection, press the <p>
button. Press the <p> button again to
resume detection.
• Switchtoanothermodewhenyounishshooting,orthecamerawill
continue shooting each time a smile is detected.
• You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
• The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the camera and
open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible.
• To change the number of shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing
[
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (=
48)isonlyavailableforthenalshot.
Still Images
Using the Wink Self-Timer
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way down.
The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.
1 Choose [ ].
Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(=
52) and choose [ ], and then
press the <
> button.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [
], and then press
the <
> button.
2 Compose the shot and press
the shutter button halfway.
Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face of the person who will
wink.
3 Press the shutter button all the
way down.
The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
displayed.
The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
61
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
4 Face the camera and wink.
The camera will shoot about two seconds
after detecting a wink by the person
whose face is inside the frame.
To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
<n> button.
• If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
• Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat, or glasses.
• Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink.
• If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
• To change the number of shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing
[
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (=
48)isonlyavailableforthenalshot.
• If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is pressed all the way
down, the camera will shoot after a person enters the shooting area and winks.
Still Images
Using the Face Self-Timer
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
(=
82). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar
shots.
1 Choose [ ].
Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(=
52) and choose [ ], and then
press the <
> button.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [
], and then press
the <
> button.
2 Compose the shot and press
the shutter button halfway.
Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces.
3 Press the shutter button all the
way down.
The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
start count down] is displayed.
The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
4 Join the subjects in the
shooting area and look at the
camera.
After the camera detects a new face, the
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will
speedup.(Whentheashres,thelamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,
the camera will shoot.
To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
<n> button.
• Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the shooting area,
the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
• To change the number of shots, press the <o><p> buttons after choosing
[
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (=
48)isonlyavailableforthenalshot.
62
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
Still Images
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies
(Star Nightscape)
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in the
image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.
1 Choose [ ].
Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(=
52) and choose [ ], and then
press the <
> button.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [
], and then press
the <m> button.
2 Secure the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still and
prevent camera shake.
3 Shoot.
• Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
and combines the images.
• To disable image processing that makes stars more prominent, choose MENU
►[4]tab►[StarEmphasis]►[Off].
• Set [Night Display] to [On] (=
90) in this mode.
• Switch to manual focus mode (=
78) to more accurately specify the focal
position before shooting.
• This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a
commerciallyavailablecolor-compensatinglter(=
74).
Still Images
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in a
single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots, the
camera shoots continuously. Each shooting session lasts up to about two
hours. Check the battery level in advance.
1 Choose [ ].
Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(=
52) and choose [ ], and then
press the <
> button.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [
], and then press
the <m> button.
2 Specify the duration of the
shooting session.
Turn the <z> dial to choose the
shooting duration.
3 Secure the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
63
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
4 Shoot.
Press the shutter button all the way
down.[Busy]isdisplayedbriey,and
then shooting begins.
Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
To cancel shooting, press the shutter
button all the way down again.
• If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a
composite image created from the images up to that point is saved.
• Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
and combines the images.
• Set [Night Display] to [On] (=
90) in this mode.
• Switch to manual focus mode (=
78) to more accurately specify the focal
position before shooting.
• This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a
commerciallyavailablecolor-compensatinglter(=
74).
Movies
Shooting Movies of Star Movement
(Star Time-Lapse Movie)
Stillimagesarecapturedcontinuouslyoveraspecieddurationand
combined to create a movie. The camera shoots once each minute, and no
sound is recorded.
Starsmovequicklyduringplayback,soyoucanviewtheirmovement
in a short time. Each shooting session lasts up to about two hours, and
many shots are taken. Check the battery level and memory card space in
advance.
1 Choose [ ].
Followsteps1–2in“SpecicScenes”
(=
52) and choose [ ], and then
press the <
> button.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [
], and then press
the <m> button.
2 Specify the duration of the
shooting session.
Turn the <z> dial to choose the
shooting duration.
3 Secure the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
4 Check the brightness.
Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot a single still image.
Switch to Playback mode (=
101) and
check image brightness.
To adjust brightness, turn the exposure
compensation dial and change the
exposure level. Check brightness again
by taking another shot.
5 Shoot.
Press the movie button. [Busy] is
displayedbriey,andthenshooting
begins.
The indicator blinks throughout the
shooting session.
Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again.
The camera operates in Eco mode
(=
152) while shooting.
Estimated Shooting and Playback Times
Session Time Playback Time
[120'] Approx. 8 sec.
[90'] Approx. 6 sec.
[60'] Approx. 4 sec.
• If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that point
is saved.
• Maximum available shooting duration varies depending on free
space on the memory card.
• Optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted.
• There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
the images.
• Tosaveeachshotcollectedbeforethemovieiscreated,chooseMENU►
[4]tab►[Save
Stills]►[On].Notethattheseindividualimagesare
managedasasinglegroup,andduringplayback,onlytherstimageis
displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [
] is displayed
in the upper left of the screen. If you erase a grouped image (=
114), all
images in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
• Set [Night Display] to [On] (=
90) in this mode.
• Switch to manual focus mode (=
78) to more accurately specify the focal
position before shooting.
• This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a
commerciallyavailablecolor-compensatinglter(=
74).
65
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Movies
Shooting Various Movies
Shooting Movies in [E] Mode
1 Enter [E] mode.
Set the mode dial to [E].
Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. These areas
will not be recorded.
2 Congurethesettingstosuit
the movie (=
193 – 201).
3 Shoot.
Press the movie button.
To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
Movies
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure or change it in 1/3-stop
increments within a range of –3 to +3.
1 Lock the exposure.
Press the < > button to lock the
exposure. The exposure shift bar is
displayed.
To unlock the exposure, press the < >
button again.
2 Adjust the exposure.
Turn the <7> dial to adjust the exposure,
as you watch the screen.
3 Shoot (=
65).
66
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Movies
Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies
You can shoot fast-moving subjects for playback later in slow motion. Note
that sound is not recorded.
1 Choose [ ].
Set the mode dial to [E].
Press the <m> button, choose [E]
in the menu, and then choose [
]
(=
24).
2 Choose a frame rate.
Press the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired frame
rate (=
24).
Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
3 Shoot (=
65).
A bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed. Maximum clip length is approx.
30 sec.
Frame Rate Image Quality
Playback Time (For a 30-
sec. Clip)
240 fps
(320 x 240)
Approx. 4 min.
120 fps
(640 x 480)
Approx. 2 min.
• Zooming is not available during recording, even if you move the
zoom lever.
• Focus, exposure, and color are determined when you press the
movie button.
• When you play the movie (=
102), it will be played back in slow motion.
• You can change the playback speed of movies by using the software
(=
173).
67
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
• Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set to [G] mode.
• [G]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
• Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than [G], make sure the function is available in that mode
(=
193 – 201).
4
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ............... 68
Image Brightness (Exposure) ......................... 68
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation) ....................................68
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure
(AE Lock) ..............................................................69
Changing the Metering Method .............................69
Changing the ISO Speed ......................................70
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO NR) ....................................................... 71
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) ...........72
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) ..............72
Using the ND Filter ................................................73
Color and Continuous Shooting .....................74
Adjusting White Balance .......................................74
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ............ 75
Continuous Shooting .............................................76
Shooting Range and Focusing ....................... 77
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths
(Step Zoom) ..........................................................77
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) .................................78
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ...........................78
Digital Tele-Converter ............................................80
Changing the AF Frame Mode .............................. 81
Changing the Focus Setting ..................................84
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select) .....84
Shooting with the AF Lock .....................................85
Flash ..................................................................85
Changing the Flash Mode ..................................... 85
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation .......86
Shooting with the FE Lock ....................................87
Changing the Flash Timing ...................................87
Shooting RAW Images .....................................88
Other Settings ..................................................89
Changing the Compression Ratio
(Image Quality) ......................................................89
Changing the IS Mode Settings ............................89
Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen
Information ............................................................90
68
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1 Enter [G] mode.
Set the mode dial to [G].
2 Customize the settings as
desired (=
68 – 90), and
then shoot.
• Ifadequateexposurecannotbeobtainedwhenyoupresstheshutterbutton
halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. In this
case, try adjusting the ISO speed (=
70)oractivatingtheash(ifsubjects
are dark, =
85),whichmayenableadequateexposure.
• Movies can be recorded in [G] mode as well, by pressing the movie button.
However, some FUNC. (=
24) and MENU (=
25) settings may be
automatically adjusted for movie recording.
• For details on the shooting range in [G] mode, see “Shooting Range”
(=
205).
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Still Images
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –3 to +3.
As you watch the screen, turn the
exposure compensation dial to adjust
brightness.
Thecorrectionlevelyouspeciedisnow
displayed.
69
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure
(AE Lock)
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
1 Lock the exposure.
Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the <
> button.
[ ] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
After one shot, AE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
• AE: Auto Exposure
• After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination of shutter speed
and aperture value by turning the <7> dial (Program Shift).
Still Images
Changing the Metering Method
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
Press the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(=
24).
Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
Evaluative
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit shots.
Automatically adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions.
Center
Weighted Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light across the entire
image area, calculated by treating brightness in the central area
as more important.
Spot
Metering restricted to within the [
] (Spot AE Point frame). You
can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame (=
70).
70
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
1 Set the metering method to [ ].
Follow the steps in “Changing the
Metering Method” (=
69) to choose
[
].
2 Congurethesetting.
Press the <n> button, choose
[Spot AE Point] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [AF Point] (=
25).
The Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
(=
81).
• Not available when [AF Frame] is set to [Face AiAF] (=
82) or
[Tracking AF] (=
82).
Still Images
Changing the ISO Speed
Press the < > button, turn the <7> dial
to choose the ISO speed, and then press
the <m> button.
Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
AUTO
Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the
shooting mode and conditions.
80, 100, 125, 160, 200
Low
High
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800
For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at
twilight.
1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500,
3200, 4000, 5000, 6400, 8000,
10000, 12800
For shooting night scenes, or in dark
rooms.
• To view the automatically set ISO speed when the camera is set to [AUTO],
press the shutter button halfway.
• Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image graininess, there
may be a greater risk of subject blurriness in some shooting conditions.
• Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which may reduce
subjectblurrinessandincreasetheashrange.However,shotsmaylook
grainy.
71
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Whenthecameraissetto[AUTO],maximumISOspeedcanbespecied
inarangeof[400]–[12800],andsensitivitycanbespeciedinarangeof
three levels.
1 Access the setting screen.
Press the <n> button, choose [ISO
Auto Settings] on the [4] tab, and then
press the <m> button (=
25).
2 Congurethesetting.
Chooseamenuitemtocongure,and
then choose the desired option (=
25).
• You can also access the [ISO Auto Settings] screen when the ISO speed
setting screen (=
70) is displayed, by pressing the <n> button.
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO NR)
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
Press the <n> button, choose [High
ISO NR] on the [4] tab, and then choose
the desired option (=
25).
• Not available with [ ] or [ ] (=
88).
72
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each time
you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and overexposure
(relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
1 Choose [ ].
Press the <m> button, choose
[
] in the menu, and then choose [ ]
(=
24).
2 Congurethesetting.
Press the < > button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the <q><r>
buttons or turning the <7> dial.
• AEB shooting is only available in [!] mode (=
86).
• Continuous shooting (=
76) is not available in this mode.
• If exposure compensation is already in use (=
68),thevaluespeciedfor
that function is treated as the standard exposure level for this function.
• You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing the <n>
button when the exposure compensation screen (=
68) is displayed.
• Threeshotsaretaken,regardlessofanyquantityspeciedin[$] (=
37).
• In [Blink Detection] mode (=
48),thisfunctionisonlyavailableforthenal
shot.
Still Images
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal
brightness.
To avoid washed-out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To
preserve image detail in shadows, specify Shadow Correct.
• Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
may cause images to appear grainy.
• You can also correct existing images (=
120).
• You can customize camera operation so that turning the <z> or <7> dial
adjusts DR Correction or Shadow Correct settings (=
96).
73
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)
Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out, as
follows.
Press the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(=
24
).
Option Details
Available ISO Speed
(=
70)
–
Automatic adjustment to prevent washed-out
highlights
AUTO, 80 – 12800
Tone down highlights by about 200% relative to
the brightness level of [
].
AUTO, 160 – 3200
Tone down highlights by about 400% relative to
the brightness level of [
].
AUTO, 320 – 3200
• ISO speed (=
70) will be adjusted to a speed within the
supportedrangeifyouhavespeciedavalueoutsidethesupported
range indicated here.
Still Images
Shadow Correct
Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows.
Press the <m> button, choose
[
] in the menu, and then choose [ ]
(=
24).
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Using the ND Filter
To shoot at slower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values, use the
NDlter,whichreduceslightintensityto1/8theactuallevel(equivalentto
3 stops).
Press the <m> button, choose
[
] in the menu, and then choose [ ]
(=
24).
• Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still
and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode]
to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera
(=
89).
• ND: Neutral Density
74
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Color and Continuous Shooting
Still Images Movies
Adjusting White Balance
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
Press the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(=
24).
Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the shooting
conditions.
Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy conditions, in the shade, or at twilight.
Tungsten
For shooting under ordinary incandescent (tungsten) lighting
andsimilarlycoloreduorescentlighting.
Fluorescent
For shooting under warm-white (or similarly colored) or cool-
whiteuorescentlighting.
Fluorescent H
Forshootingunderdaylightuorescentandsimilarlycolored
uorescentlighting.
h
Flash Forshootingwiththeash.
S
Underwater
Sets the optimal white balance for shooting underwater. Tones
down blues to produce natural-looking colors overall.
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance (=
74).
Still Images Movies
Custom White Balance
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (=
74) to choose [ ] or [ ].
Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
the < > button.
The tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
• Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
Still Images Movies
Manually Correcting White Balance
You can manually correct white balance. This adjustment can match the
effectofusingacommerciallyavailablecolortemperatureconversionlter
orcolor-compensatinglter.
1 Congurethesetting.
Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (=
74) to choose the white
balance option.
Turn the <z> dial to adjust the
correction level for B and A.
Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
75
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
2 Congureadvancedsettings.
Toconguremoreadvancedsettings,
press the <n> button and turn
the <z> or <7> dial to adjust the
correction level.
To reset the correction level, press the
<
> button.
Press the <n> button to complete
the setting.
• The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if you
switch to another white balance option in step 1, but correction
levels will be reset if you record custom white balance data.
• B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
• Onelevelofblue/ambercorrectionisequivalenttoabout7miredsonacolor
temperatureconversionlter.(Mired:Colortemperatureunitrepresentingcolor
temperatureconversionlterdensity)
• You can customize camera operation so that the B and A adjustment screen
can be accessed simply by turning the <z> dial (=
96).
Still Images Movies
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
Press the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(=
24).
Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
My Colors Off
–
Vivid
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation, making images
sharper.
Neutral
Tones down contrast and color saturation for subdued
images.
Sepia Creates sepia tone images.
B/W Creates black and white images.
Positive Film
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, and Vivid
Red to produce intense yet natural-looking colors resembling
imagesonpositivelm.
Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.
Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.
Vivid Blue
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky, ocean, and
other blue subjects more vivid.
Vivid Green
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains, foliage,
and other green subjects more vivid.
Vivid Red Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red subjects more vivid.
Custom Color
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and other
qualitiesasdesired(=
76).
76
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• White balance (=
74) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.
• With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone may
change. These settings may not produce the expected results with
some skin tones.
Still Images Movies
Custom Color
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
1 Access the setting screen.
Follow the steps in “Changing Image
Color Tones (My Colors)” (=
75) to
choose [
], and then press the < >
button.
2 Congurethesetting.
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose
an option, and then specify the value by
pressing the <q><r> buttons or turning
the <7> dial.
For stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
Press the < > button to complete the
setting.
Still Images
Continuous Shooting
Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting
Speed” (=
205).
1 Congurethesetting.
Press the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(=
24).
Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
2 Shoot.
Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
Mode Description
W
Continuous
Continuous shooting, with the focus and exposure determined
when you press the shutter button halfway.
Continuous
Shooting AF*
Continuous shooting and focusing.
[AF Frame] is set to [Center] and cannot be changed.
* In [t] mode (=
53), manual focus mode (=
78), or when AF is locked
(=
85), [ ] is changed to [ ].
• Cannot be used with the self-timer (=
36) or [Blink Detection]
(=
48).
• Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
• As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
• Shootingmayslowdowniftheashres.
77
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• When using Face ID (=
39), the location in the image where the name is
recordedwillbedeterminedintherstshot,andwillberecordedinthesame
place for further shots.
Images Displayed during Playback
Each set of images shot continuously in [
G
], [
M
], [
B
], or [
D
] mode is
managedasasinglegroup,andonlytherstimageinthatgroupwillbe
displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed
in the upper left of the screen.
• If you erase a grouped image (=
114), all images in the group are
also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
• Grouped images can be played back individually (=
108) and ungrouped
(=
108).
• Protecting (=
111) a grouped image will protect all images in the group.
• Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back using Image
Search (=
106)orSmartShufe(=
110). In this case, images are
temporarily ungrouped.
• These actions are not available for grouped images: magnifying (=
109),
editing Face ID information (=
108), tagging as favorites (=
117), editing
(=
118 – 121), printing (=
176), setting up individual image printing
(=
181), or adding to a photobook (=
182). To do these things, either view
grouped images individually (=
108) or cancel grouping (=
108)rst.
Shooting Range and Focusing
Still Images Movies
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths
(Step Zoom)
You can shoot at preset focal lengths of 28, 35, 50, 85, 100 or 140 mm
(35mmlmequivalent).Thisisconvenientwhenyouwanttoshootatthe
angle of view of those focal lengths.
1 Assign [ ] to the <z> dial
(=
96).
2 Choose a focal length.
Turn the <z> dial clockwise until it
clicks to change the focal length from
28 mm to 35 mm. Keep turning the <z>
dial to increase the focal length, which
changes to 50, 85, 100, and 140 mm at
each click.
• Step zoom is not available when shooting movies even if you turn
the <z> dial.
• When using the digital zoom (=
35), turning the <z> dial clockwise will
not change the zoom factor. However, turning the <z> dial counterclockwise
will set the focal length to 140 mm.
78
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [e]. For
details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range” (=
205).
Press the <q> button, choose [e] (either
press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Once the setting is complete, [e] is
displayed.
• Iftheashres,vignettingmayoccur.
• Be careful to avoid damaging the lens.
• To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod and shooting
with the camera set to [[] (=
37).
Still Images Movies
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button halfway
to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the position
youspecied.Fordetailsonthefocusingrange,see“ShootingRange”
(=
205).
1 Choose [f].
Press the <o> button, and then press
the <m> button.
[f] and the MF indicator are displayed.
2 Specify the general focal
position.
Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
bar (which shows the distance and focal
position)andthemagnieddisplayarea,
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to specify the general focal
position, and then press the <m> button.
Toadjustthemagnication,pressthe
<r> button.
Move the focusing frame as needed
(=
81).
MF Indicator
79
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
3 Fine-tune the focus.
Press the shutter button halfway to have
thecamerane-tunethefocalposition
(Safety MF).
To cancel manual focus, press the <q>
button.
• When you focus manually, the AF frame mode (=
81) is
[FlexiZone] and AF frame size (=
81) is [Normal], and these
settings cannot be changed.
• Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (=
35) or digital
tele-converter (=
80), or when using a TV as a display (=
165),
butthemagnieddisplaywillnotappear.
• To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to stabilize it.
• Tohideorenlargethemagnieddisplayarea,pressthe<n> button and
adjust the [MF-Point Zoom] settings on the [4] tab as needed (=
25).
• Todeactivateautomaticfocusne-tuningwhentheshutterbuttonispressed
halfway, press the <n> button and set [Safety MF] on the [4] tab to [Off]
(=
25).
Still Images
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge detection
as needed.
1 Access the setting screen.
Press the <n> button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [4] tab, and
then choose [On] (=
25).
2 Congurethesetting.
Chooseamenuitemtocongure,and
then choose the desired option (=
25).
• Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
80
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
rstoneatthefocaldistanceyousetmanuallyandtheothersatfarther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
speciedfocuscanbesetinthreelevels.
1 Choose [ ].
Press the <m> button, choose
[
] in the menu, and then choose [ ]
(=
24).
2 Congurethesetting.
Press the < > button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the <q><r>
buttons or turning the <7> dial.
• Focus bracketing is only available in [!] mode (=
86).
• Continuous shooting (=
76) is not available in this mode.
• You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the <n>
button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode” (=
78).
• Threeshotsaretaken,regardlessofanyquantityspeciedin[$] (=
37).
• In [Blink Detection] mode (=
48),thisfunctionisonlyavailableforthenal
shot.
Still Images Movies
Digital Tele-Converter
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.5x or 2.0x.
This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster than it
would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the same zoom
factor.
Press the <n> button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [4] tab, and then
choose the desired option (=
25).
The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
• The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom
(=
35) or AF-point zoom (=
47).
• The respective focal lengths when using [1.5x] and [2.0x] are 42.0 – 210.0 mm
and56.0–280.0mm(35mmlmequivalent).
• Theshutterspeedmaybeequivalentwhenyoumovethezoomleverallthe
way toward <i> for maximum telephoto, and when you zoom in to enlarge
the subject to the same size following step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects
(Digital Zoom)” (=
35).
81
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Changing the AF Frame Mode
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as
follows.
Press the <n> button, choose [AF
Frame] on the [4] tab, and then choose
the desired option (=
25).
Still Images
FlexiZone/Center
One AF frame is displayed. Effective for reliable focusing.
With [FlexiZone], you can move and resize the AF frame (=
81).
• A yellow AF frame is displayed with [
] if the camera cannot focus
when you press the shutter button halfway.
• To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or in a corner,
rstaimthecameratocapturethesubjectinanAFframe,andthenhold
the shutter button halfway down. As you continue to hold the shutter button
halfway, recompose the shot as desired, and then press the shutter button all
the way down (Focus Lock).
Still Images
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (FlexiZone)
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
frame mode to [FlexiZone] (=
81).
1 Prepare to move the AF frame.
Press the < > button. The AF frame
turns orange.
2 Move and resize the AF frame.
Turn the <7> dial to move the AF frame,
or press the <o><p><q><r> buttons
to move it by a smaller amount.
To return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, keep the <
>
button held down.
To reduce the AF frame size, press the
<n> button. Press it again to restore
it to the original size.
3 Finish the setup process.
Press the < > button.
82
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Face AiAF
• Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
• After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected
faces.
• When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving subjects,
within a certain range.
• After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
• If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
(without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in the
areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
• If faces are not detected when Servo AF (=
83) is set to [On], the
AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press
the shutter button halfway.
• Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Facesinprole,atanangle,orpartlyhidden
• The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
• No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Still Images Movies
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.
1 Choose [Tracking AF].
Follow the steps in “Changing the AF
Frame Mode” (=
81) to choose
[Tracking AF].
[ ] is displayed in the center of the
screen.
2 Choose a subject to focus on.
Aim the camera so that [ ] is on the
desired subject, and then press the <
>
button.
When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [
] is displayed. Even if the
subject moves, the camera will continue
to track the subject within a certain range.
If no subject is detected, [ ] is
displayed.
To cancel tracking, press the < > button
again.
83
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
3 Shoot.
Press the shutter button halfway. [ ]
changes to a blue [
], which follows
the subject as the camera continues to
adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF)
(=
83).
Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Even after your shot, [ ] is still
displayed and the camera continues to
track the subject.
• [Servo AF] (=
83) is set to [On] and cannot be changed.
• Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move
too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches that of the
background too closely.
• [AF-Point Zoom] on the [4] tab is not available.
• [e] is not available.
• The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter button halfway
without pressing the <
> button. After your shot, [ ] is displayed in the
center of the screen.
• If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered people
are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still images (=
39).
However, a name will display if the subject chosen to focus on is the same as
a person detected with Face ID.
Still Images
Shooting with Servo AF
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1 Congurethesetting.
Press the <n> button, choose
[Servo AF] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [On] (=
25).
2 Focus.
The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
• Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
• In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway. In this
case,thefocusandexposurearesetaccordingtothespeciedAF
frame mode.
• Ifadequateexposurecannotbeobtained,shutterspeedsand
aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter button,
and then press it halfway again.
• AF lock shooting is not available.
• [AF-Point Zoom] on the [4] tab is not available.
• Not available when using the self-timer (=
36).
84
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Changing the Focus Setting
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed. Instead,
you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button
halfway.
Press the <n> button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [4] tab, and then
choose [Off] (=
25).
On
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because the camera
constantly focuses on subjects until you press the shutter button halfway.
Off Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus constantly.
Still Images
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
Youcanshootafterchoosingaspecicperson’sfacetofocuson.
1 Prepare the camera for Face
Select.
Set the AF frame to [Face AiAF]
(=
82).
2 Enter Face Select mode.
Aim the camera at the person’s face and
press the <
> button.
After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [
] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
Even if the subject moves, the face frame
[
] follows the subject within a certain
range.
If a face is not detected, [ ] is not
displayed.
3 Choose the face to focus on.
To switch the face frame [ ] to another
detected face, press the <
> button.
After you have switched the face frame
to all detected faces, [Face Select : Off]
isdisplayed,andthespeciedAFframe
mode screen is displayed again.
85
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
4 Shoot.
Press the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [
] changes to [ ].
Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
• When [Face ID] is set to [On], names of any registered people detected are
not displayed when you have selected another, unregistered face to focus on.
However, their names will be recorded in the still images (=
39).
Still Images Movies
Shooting with the AF Lock
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will not
changeevenwhenyoureleaseyourngerfromtheshutterbutton.
1 Lock the focus.
With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the <o> button.
The focus is now locked, and [f] and
the MF indicator are displayed.
To unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the <o>
button again.
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
Flash
Still Images
Changing the Flash Mode
Youcanchangetheashmodetomatchtheshootingscene.Fordetailson
theashrange,see“FlashRange”(=
205).
1 Raisetheash.
Move the < > switch.
2 Congurethesetting.
Press the <r>button,chooseaash
mode (either press the <q><r> buttons
or turn the <7> dial), and then press the
<m> button.
Theoptionyouconguredisnow
displayed.
• The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the <r> button
whentheashislowered.Movethe<
>switchtoraisetheash,
thencongurethesetting.
[ ] Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
[h] On
Fires for each shot.
[Z] Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slowershutterspeedtoilluminatebackgroundsoutofashrange.
86
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• In [Z] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures
to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should
set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (=
89).
• In [Z]mode,evenaftertheashres,ensurethatthemainsubject
doesnotmoveuntiltheshuttersoundisnishedplaying.
[!] Off
Forshootingwithouttheash.
• If a blinking [
] icon is displayed when you press the shutter button
halfway in low-light conditions, mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Still Images
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Just as with regular exposure compensation (=
68), you can adjust the
ashexposurefrom–2to+2stops,in1/3-stopincrements.
Raisetheash,pressthe<r> button and
immediately turn the <z> dial to choose
the compensation level, and then press
the <m> button.
Thecorrectionlevelyouspeciedisnow
displayed.
• When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically adjusts the
shutterspeedoraperturevalueduringtheashshotstoreducewashed-
out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure. However, you can deactivate
automatic adjustment of the shutter speed and aperture value by accessing
MENU (=
25) and choosing [4]tab►[FlashControl]►[SafetyFE]►
[Off].
• Youcanalsoconguretheashexposurecompensationbychoosing[X] in
the FUNC. menu (=
24
), or by accessing MENU (=
25
) and choosing
[4]tab►[FlashControl]►[FlashExp.Comp].
• You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] MENU screen (=
25) as
follows(exceptwhenanoptionalexternalashismounted).
- Press and hold the <r> button for at least one second.
- Whentheashisup,pressthe<r> button and immediately press the
<n> button.
87
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Shooting with the FE Lock
Just as with the AE lock (=
69),youcanlocktheexposurefortheash
shots.
1 Raisetheashandsetitto[h]
(=
85).
2 Locktheashexposure.
Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the <
> button.
Theashres,andwhen
[
]isdisplayed,theashoutputlevelis
retained.
3 Compose the shot and shoot.
After one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
• FE: Flash Exposure
Still Images
Changing the Flash Timing
Changethetimingoftheashandshutterreleaseasfollows.
1 Access the setting screen.
Press the <n> button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [4] tab, and then press
the <m> button (=
25).
2 Congurethesetting.
Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
the desired option (=
25).
1st-curtain Theashresimmediatelyaftertheshutteropens.
2nd-curtain Theashresimmediatelybeforetheshuttercloses.
88
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Shooting RAW Images
RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no
lossofimagequalityfromthecamera’sinternalimageprocessing.Use
Digital Photo Professional (=
173) to adjust RAW images as desired with
minimallossofimagequality.
Press the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(=
24).
Records JPEG images. JPEG images are processed in the camera for optimal
imagequalityandcompressedtoreducelesize.However,thecompression
process is irreversible, and images cannot be restored to their original,
unprocessed state. Image processing may also cause some loss of image
quality.
Records RAW images. RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with
essentiallynolossofimagequalityfromthecamera’simageprocessing.The
data cannot be used in this state for viewing on a computer or printing. You must
rstusethesoftware(DigitalPhotoProfessional)toconvertimagestoordinary
JPEGorTIFFles.Imagescanbeadjustedwithminimallossofimagequality.
Fordetailsonresolutionandthenumberofshotsthatwilltonacard,see
“Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” (=
204).
Records two images, both a RAW image and a JPEG image, for each shot.
The JPEG image can be viewed on a computer or printed without using the
software.
• When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
software (=
173).
• Digital zoom (=
35), date stamps (=
38), and red-eye
reduction (=
45) are set to [Off] in [ ] and [ ] modes.
Additionally, noise reduction level (=
71), i-Contrast (=
72)
and My Colors (=
75)cannotbecongured.
• TheleextensionforJPEGimagesis.JPG,andtheextensionfor
RAW images is .CR2.
89
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Other Settings
Still Images
Changing the Compression Ratio
(Image Quality)
Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as
follows.Forguidelinesonhowmanyshotsateachcompressionratiocant
on a memory card, see “Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card” (=
204).
Press the <m> button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(=
24).
Still Images Movies
Changing the IS Mode Settings
1 Access the setting screen.
Press the <n> button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press
the <m> button (=
25).
2 Congurethesetting.
Choose [IS Mode], and then choose the
desired option (=
25).
Continuous
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
applied (Intelligent IS) (=
34).
Shoot Only* Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting.
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
* The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.
• If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].
90
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Switching the Color of Shooting-Screen
Information
Information displayed on the shooting screen and menus can be changed to
a color suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting
is useful in modes such as [ ] (=
62).
Press the <n> button, choose [Night
Display] on the [4] tab, and then choose
[On] (=
25).
• The color is not adjusted in Playback mode.
Movies
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting
During movie recording, a smaller image display area is shown, with the
subject enlarged, as a measure when correcting other distortion such as
rotational camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
shooting, you can disable this image stabilization.
Follow the steps in “Changing the IS
Mode Settings” (=
89) to access the
[IS Settings] screen.
Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[2] (=
34).
• You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded at
the same size shown before shooting.
91
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for your shooting style
• Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective mode.
5
SpecicShutterSpeeds([Tv]Mode) ..............92
SpecicApertureValues([Av]Mode) ............93
SpecicShutterSpeedsandApertureValues
([M] Mode) ........................................................93
Adjusting the Flash Output ....................................94
Customization for Shooting Styles ................95
Customizing Display Information ...........................95
Assigning Functions to the Front Dial and Control
Dial ........................................................................ 96
Convenient Control Using the <
> or Movie
Button ....................................................................97
Customizing the FUNC. Menu
(FUNC. Menu Layout) ..................................... 98
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu .................98
Saving Shooting Settings ...................................... 99
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu) ........................................................... 100
92
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter Speed” (=
206).
1 Enter [M] mode.
Set the mode dial to [M].
2 Set the shutter speed.
Turn the <z> dial to set the shutter
speed.
Shutter Speed (sec.)
Available ISO Speed (=
70)
15 – 1.3 AUTO, 80 – 3200
1 – 1/4000 AUTO, 80 – 12800
• With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, there will be a delay
before you can shoot again, as images are processed to remove
noise.
• When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set [IS
Mode] to [Off] (=
89).
• Maximumshutterspeedwiththeashis1/2000second.Ifyou
specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the speed
to 1/2000 second before shooting.
• Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (=
93).
• Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.
• [M]: Time value
• You can customize camera operation so that turning the <7> dial changes the
shutter speed (=
96).
93
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Aperture” (=
206).
1 Enter [B] mode.
Set the mode dial to [B].
2 Set the aperture value.
Turn the <z> dial to set the aperture
value.
• Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter button
halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure.
Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is displayed in
white, or use safety shift (see below).
• [B]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the lens)
• To avoid exposure problems in [M] and [B] modes, you can have the
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed or aperture value, even when
standard exposure cannot otherwise be obtained. Press the <n> button
and set [Safety Shift] on the [4] tab to [On] (=
25).
However,safetyshiftisdisabledwhentheashres.
• You can customize camera operation so that turning the <7> dial changes the
aperture value (=
96).
Still Images
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed and
aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Shutter
Speed” (=
206) and “Aperture” (=
206).
1 Enter [D] mode.
Set the mode dial to [D].
2 Congurethesetting.
Turn the <z> dial to set the shutter
speed, and turn the <7> dial to set the
aperture value.
An exposure level mark based on your
speciedvalueisshownontheexposure
level indicator for comparison to the
standard exposure level.
The exposure level mark is shown in
orange when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 2 stops.
Shutter Speed (sec.)
Available ISO Speed (=
70)
250 – 40 80
30 – 1.3 80 – 3200
1 – 1/4000 80 – 12800
Aperture Value
Shutter Speed
Standard
Exposure Level
Exposure Level
Mark
Exposure
Level Indicator
94
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure level
may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
• Screen brightness may change depending on your specied shutter
speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness remains the
same when the ash is up and the mode is set to [h].
• Use a sufciently charged battery when shooting with the shutter
speed set from 40 to 250 seconds, because the longer shooting
time shortens battery life more than other shooting methods.
• To have both the shutter speed and aperture value automatically
adjusted to obtain standard exposure, hold the shutter button
halfway and press the < > button. Note that standard exposure
may not be possible with some settings.
• Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy.
• [D]: Manual
• Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specied metering method
(=
69).
• The battery level indicated is based on estimated battery consumption under
the current shutter speed setting. Changing the shutter speed may cause this
level to be updated.
• You can customize camera operation so that turning the <7> dial adjusts the
shutter speed and turning the <z> dial adjusts the aperture value (=
96).
Still Images
Adjusting the Flash Output
Choose from the three ash levels in [D] mode.
1 Enter [D] mode.
Set the mode dial to [D].
2 Congurethesetting.
Raise the ash, press the <r> button and
immediately turn the <z> dial to choose
the ash level, and then press the <m>
button.
Once the setting is complete, the ash
output level is displayed.
[
]: low, [ ]: medium, [ ]: high
• You can also set the ash level by choosing [X] in the FUNC. menu (=
24),
or by accessing MENU (=
25) and choosing [4] tab ► [Flash Control] ►
[Flash Output].
• You can set the ash level in [M] or [B] mode by accessing MENU
(=
25) and choosing [4] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Flash Mode] ►
[Manual].
• You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] MENU screen as follows
(except when an optional external ash is mounted).
- Press and hold the <r> button for at least one second.
- When the ash is up, press the <r> button and immediately press the
<n> button.
95
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Customization for Shooting Styles
Still Images Movies
Customizing Display Information
Set the number of custom displays (=
23) and what information is
displayed in each display when the <p> button is pressed in shooting
screen.
1 Access the setting screen.
Press the <n> button, choose
[Custom Display] on the [4] tab, and
then press the <m> button (=
25).
2 Choose[LCD/Viewnder].
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial, and then press the
<m>buttontocongurecustomdisplays
[
], [ ] or [ ] which are displayed
when the <p> button is pressed.
Press the <m> button to add [ ] ([ ],
[
], or [ ]) to custom displays so that
they do not display when the <p> button
is pressed.
Note that [ ] cannot be applied to [LCD/
Viewnder]customdisplaycurrentlyin
use.
3 Congurethesetting.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose an item, and
then press the <m> button. Items you
choose for display are labeled with [
].
Selected items (labeled with a [ ]) will
be included in display.
Shooting Info
Displays shooting information (=
191).
Grid Lines Displays a reference grid.
Electronic
Level
Displays the electronic level (=
47).
Histogram
Displays a histogram (=
103) in [G], [M], [B], and [D] modes.
• Settings will not be saved if you press the shutter button halfway
and return to the shooting screen from the custom display settings
screen.
• Grayed-outitemscanalsobespecied,buttheymaynotbe
displayed in some shooting modes.
• Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.
96
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Assigning Functions to the Front Dial and
Control Dial
Assign commonly used functions to the front dial and control dial, by
shooting mode.
1 Access the setting screen.
Press the <n> button, choose [Set
z7 Func.] on the [4] tab, and then
press the <
m
> button (=
25).
2 Congurethesetting.
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose an
item.
Tocongurethesettings,pressthe
<o><p> buttons, choose an item (either
press the <o><p><q><r> buttons
or turn the <7> dial), and then turn the
<z> dial to change the function.
Assignable Functions
Functions you can assign to the front dial and control dial vary depending
on shooting mode. On the setting screen, you can assign aspect ratio
switching (=
44), ISO speed (=
70), dynamic range correction
(=
73), shadow correction (=
73), white balance correction (=
74),
step zooming (=
77), or manual focusing (=
78) in modes indicated
by in the following table.
Item
Shooting Mode
D B M G
Front Dial 1
z M B M
7
B,
Front Dial 2
z B B M
7
M,
Front Dial 3
z B, M B M
7
Control Dial
z
7 B, M B M
•[B]: aperture value (=
93); [M]: shutter speed (=
92)
• When multiple functions are assigned to the <7> dial, press the <
> button
to switch between them.
• Selecting [Front Dial 3] enables you to adjust Program Shift (=
69), ISO
Speed (=
70), and Manual Focus (=
78) on relevant setting screens by
using <z> dial.
97
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Convenient Control Using the < > or Movie
Button
Youcanquicklyandeasilyactivatefunctionsthatyouassigntothe< > or
movie button.
1 Access the setting screen.
Press the <n> button, choose [Set
Shortcut button] or [Set
button] on the
[4] tab, and then press the <m> button
(=
25).
2 Congurethesetting.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose a function to
assign, and then press the <m> button.
3 Use the assigned function as
needed.
To activate an assigned function, press
the button you assigned it to.
• To restore default settings, choose [ ] in [Set Shortcut button] or [ ] in [Set
button].
• Icons labeled with [
] indicate that the function is not available in the current
shooting mode or under current function conditions.
• With [
] or [ ], each press of the assigned button records white balance data
(=
74), and the white balance setting changes to [ ] or [ ].
• With [%], each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks the focus. [%]
is then displayed.
• With [
], pressing the assigned button deactivates screen display. To restore
the display, do any of the following.
- Press any button (other than the power button)
- Hold the camera in another orientation
- Raiseorlowertheash
• You can still record movies in [
], [E] or [ ] mode even if you assign a
function to the movie button.
98
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Customizing the FUNC. Menu
(FUNC. Menu Layout)
The display of FUNC. menu items can be customized. Functions not shown
on this menu will be available on the [4] tab of the menu screen.
Still Images Movies
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
1 Access the setting screen.
Press the <n> button, choose
[FUNC. Menu Layout] on the [4]
tab, and then press the <m> button
(=
25).
2 Choose icons to include in the
menu.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons
or turn the <7> dial and then press the
<m> button to choose icons to include
in the FUNC. menu. Selected icons are
marked with a [
].
Selected items (labeled with a [ ]) will be
included in display.
Items without a [ ] will be available on
the [4] tab of the menu screen.
3 Congurethesetting.
Press the <n> button, choose [OK]
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
• The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the <m> button
when the FUNC. menu is displayed.
• Items that you remove from the FUNC. menu, add to My Menu (=
100), and
then add to the FUNC. menu again will be removed from My Menu.
Rearranging Menu Items
1 Access the setting screen.
On the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
Items to Include in the Menu” (=
98),
press the <
> button.
Press the <m> or <r> button to choose
an icon to move. Press the <o><p>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose
the new position, and then press the
<m> or <q> button.
2 Congurethesetting.
Press the <n> button, choose [OK]
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
99
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Saving Shooting Settings
Savecommonlyusedshootingmodesandyourconguredfunctionsettings
for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode dial to [ ]
or [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch shooting
modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be retained
this way.
Settings that can be saved
• Shooting modes ([G], [M], [B], and [D])
• Items set in [G], [M], [B], or [D] modes (=
68 – 94)
• Shooting menu settings
• Zoom positions
• Manual focus positions (=
78)
• My Menu settings (=
100)
1 Enter a shooting mode with
settings you want to save, and
change the settings as desired.
2 Congurethesetting.
Press the <n> button, choose [Save
Settings] on the [4] tab, and then press
the <m> button.
3 Save the settings.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose the destination, and
then press the <m> button.
• To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [
]
or [ ], change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These
setting details are not applied in other shooting modes.
• To clear information you have saved to [ ] or [ ] and restore default values,
turn the mode dial to [
] or [ ] and choose [Reset All] (=
157).
100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
3 Rearrange menu items, as
needed.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Sort], and then press
the <m> button.
Choose a menu item to move (either
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to change the order, and then
press the <m> button.
Press the <n> button.
• Grayed-outitemsinstep2canalsobespecied,buttheymaynot
be available in some shooting modes.
• To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the <n> button in
Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] and press the <q><r> buttons to
choose [Yes].
Still Images Movies
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
Youcansaveuptovecommonlyusedshootingmenuitemsonthe[ ]
tab. By customizing the [ ]tab,youcanaccesstotheseitemsquicklyfrom
a single screen.
1 Access the setting screen.
Press the <n> button, choose [My
Menu settings] on the [
] tab, and then
press the <m> button (=
25).
2 Congurethesetting.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Select items], and
then press the <m> button.
Chooseuptovemenuitemstosave
(either press the <o><p> buttons or
turn the <7> dial), and then press the
<m> button.
[ ] is displayed.
To cancel saving, press the <m> button.
[
] is no longer displayed.
Press the <n> button.
101
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways
• To prepare the camera for these operations, press the <1> button to enter Playback mode.
• It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from
other cameras.
6
Viewing ............................................................102
Switching Display Modes ....................................103
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies) ................................104
Checking People Detected in Face ID ................105
Browsing and Filtering Images .....................105
Navigating through Images in an Index...............105
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions ..106
Using the Front Dial to Filter by [
] or [ ] or
Jump by [
] or [ ] ...........................................107
Viewing Individual Images in a Group ................. 108
Editing Face ID Information ..........................108
Image Viewing Options ..................................109
Magnifying Images .............................................. 109
Viewing Slideshows ............................................110
Auto Playback of Related Images
(Smart Shufe) ....................................................110
Protecting Images ...........................................111
Choosing a Selection Method ..............................111
Choosing Images Individually ............................. 112
Selecting a Range ...............................................112
Specifying All Images at Once ............................ 113
Erasing Images ............................................... 114
Erasing Multiple Images at Once ........................ 114
Rotating Images ............................................. 116
Deactivating Auto Rotation .................................. 116
Tagging Images as Favorites ........................ 117
Convenient Control Using the <
>
Button ............................................................ 118
Editing Still Images ........................................ 118
Resizing Images ..................................................118
Cropping ..............................................................119
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) .......... 120
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) ............120
Correcting Red-Eye .............................................121
Editing Movies ................................................122
Reducing File Sizes ............................................123
Editing Digest Movies ..........................................123
102
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1 Enter Playback mode.
Press the <1> button.
Your last shot is displayed.
2 Browse through your images.
To view the previous image, press
the <q> button or turn the <7> dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the <r> button or turn the
<7> dial clockwise.
Press and hold the <q><r> buttons to
browsethroughimagesquickly.
To access Scroll Display mode, turn the
<7> dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the
<7> dial to browse through images.
To return to single-image display, press
the <m> button.
To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the <o><p> buttons in
Scroll Display mode.
Moviesareidentiedbya[ ] icon. To
play movies, go to step 3.
3 Play movies.
To start playback, press the <m> button
to access the movie control panel,
choose [
] (either press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button again.
4 Adjust the volume.
Press the <o><p> buttons to adjust the
volume.
To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator is no longer displayed, press the
<o><p> buttons.
5 Pause playback.
To pause or resume playback, press the
<m> button.
Afterthemovieisnished,[ ] is
displayed.
Volume Indicator
103
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
halfway.
• To deactivate Scroll Display, press the <n> button, choose [Scroll
Display] on the [1] tab, and then choose [Off].
• If you prefer to have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, press the <n> button, and on the [1] tab, choose [Resume] and
then [Last shot].
• To change the transition shown between images, press the <n> button,
choose [Transition Effect] on the [1] tab, and then choose the desired effect.
Still Images Movies
Switching Display Modes
Press the <p> button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback
(Detailed Information Display)” (=
192).
No Information
Display
Simple
Information
Display
Detailed
Information
Display
RGB Histogram,
GPS Information
Display
Still Images Movies
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Washed-outhighlightsintheimageashonthescreenindetailed
information display (=
103).
Still Images Movies
Histogram
The graph in detailed information display
(=
103) is a histogram showing the
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
The histogram can also be accessed
while shooting (=
95, 191).
High
Dark
Low
Bright
104
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
The RGB histogram shows the
distribution of shades of red, green, and
blue in an image. The horizontal axis
represents R, G, or B brightness, and the
vertical axis, how much of the image is
at that level of brightness. Viewing this
histogram enables you to check image
color characteristics.
Using a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
(=
146). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
• [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available on
your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
• UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as Greenwich Mean
Time
• GPS information display is not available for images that lack this information.
Movies
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (=
31) on a day
of still image shooting as follows.
1 Choose an image.
Choose a still image labeled with [ ]
and press the <m> button.
2 Play the movie.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK].
The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
• After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when you are using the
camera with information display deactivated (=
103).
105
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Browsing and Filtering Images
Still Images Movies
Navigating through Images in an Index
Bydisplayingmultipleimagesinanindex,youcanquicklyndtheimages
you are looking for.
1 Display images in an index.
Move the zoom lever toward <g> to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward <k>. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2 Choose an image.
Turn the <7> dial to scroll through the
images.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose an image.
An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
Press the <m> button to view the
selected image in single-image display.
• To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the <o><p>
buttons or turn the <7> dial rapidly), press the <n> button, and on the
[1] tab, set [Index Effect] to [Off].
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
1 Choose a movie.
Press the <n> button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [1] tab, and
then choose a date (=
25).
2 Play the movie.
Press the <m> button to start playback.
Still Images
Checking People Detected in Face ID
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (=
103), the
namesofuptovedetectedpeopleregisteredinFaceID(=
39) will be
displayed.
Press the <p> button several times until
simple information display is activated,
and then press the <q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose an image.
Names will be displayed on detected
people.
• If you do not want names to display on images shot using Face ID, press the
<n> button, choose [Face ID Info] on the [1] tab, and then set [Name
Display] to [Off].
106
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Finding Images Matching Specied
Conditions
Finddesiredimagesquicklyonamemorycardfullofimagesbyltering
imagedisplayaccordingtoyourspeciedconditions.Youcanalsoprotect
(=
111) or delete (=
114) these images all at once.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (=
117).
Shot Date Displaystheimagesshotonaspecicdate.
People Displays images with detected faces.
Still image/Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
[
] mode (=
31).
Name
Displays images of a registered person (=
39).
Still Images Movies
Filtering Display by [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ]
1 Choosetherstconditionfor
image display or navigation.
In single-image display, press the < >
button, and then press the <o><p>
buttonstochooseadisplaylter.
When [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the <q><r> buttons or
turning the <7> dial. To perform an
action for all of these images together,
press the <m> button and go to step 3.
2 Choose the second condition
and check the images found.
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose
another condition. Once you turn the
<7> dial, you can view the images
narrowed down by your conditions.
To cancel this mode, press the <n>
button.
Toswitchtolteredimagedisplay,press
the <m> button and go to step 3.
3 Viewthelteredimages.
Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view
only these images, press the <q><r>
buttons, or turn the <7> dial.
Tocancelltereddisplay,pressthe< >
button.
• When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
• To show or hide information, press the <p> button in step 3.
• Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include “Navigating through
Images in an Index” (=
105), “Magnifying Images” (=
109), and “Viewing
Slideshows” (=
110). You can protect, erase, or print all images found or add
them to a photobook by choosing [Select All Images in Search] in “Protecting
Images” (=
111), “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (=
114), “Adding
Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (=
180), or “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(=
182).
• If you edit images and save them as new images (=
118 – 121), a message
is displayed, and the images that were found are no longer shown.
107
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Filtering Display by [ ]
1 Choose [ ].
Following step 1 in “Filtering Display by
[
], [ ], [ ], or [ ]” (=
106), choose
[
] and press the <m> button.
2 Choose a person.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons
to choose a person, and then press the
<m> button.
3 Viewthelteredimages.
Follow step 3 in “Filtering Display by [ ],
[
], [ ], or [ ]” (=
106) to view the
images.
• [
] is not available unless people are registered (=
39).
Using the Front Dial to Filter by [ ] or [ ] or
Jump by [
] or [ ]
Jump to Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (=
117).
Jump Shot Date
Jumps to the rst image in each group of images that
were shot on the same date.
Jump 10 Images Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jump 100 Images Jumps by 100 images at a time.
1 Choose a condition.
Choose a condition (or jump method) in
single-image display by turning the <z>
dial and then pressing the <o><p>
buttons.
2 View images matching your
speciedcondition,orjumpby
thespeciedamount.
Turn the <z> dial to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specied number of images forward or
back.
• Turning the <z> dial when browsing images in index display will jump to the
previous or next image according to the jump method chosen in single-image
display. However, if you have chosen [
] or [ ], the jump method will be
switched to [
].
108
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Grouped images (either from continuous shooting (=
76) in [
G
], [
M
],
[
B
], or [
D
] mode (=
67, 92, or 93) or individual still images saved
as source data in [
] mode (=
63)) are generally displayed together,
but they can also be viewed individually.
1 Choose a grouped image.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image labeled
with [ ], and then press the <m>
button.
2 View images in the group
individually.
Pressing the <q><r> buttons or turning
the <7> dial will display only images in
the group.
Pressing the < > button will display
[Display all images]. Press <m> to
cancel group playback.
• Duringgroupplayback(step2),youcanbrowsethroughimagesquickly
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (=
105) and magnify them
“Magnifying Images” (=
109). By choosing [All Images in Group] for
“Protecting Images” (=
111), “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (=
114),
“Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (=
180), or “Adding Images to a
Photobook” (=
182), all images in the group can be manipulated at once.
• To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still images,
press the <n> button, choose [Group Images] on the [1] tab, and then
choose [Off] (=
25). However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during
individual playback.
Editing Face ID Information
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it or
erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Changing Names
1 Access the setting screen.
Press the <n> button and choose
[Face ID Info] on the [1] tab (=
25).
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and
then press the <m> button.
2 Choose an image.
Following the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID” (=
105),
choose an image and press the <m>
button.
An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose
the name to change, and then press the
<m> button.
109
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
3 Choose the editing option.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose [Overwrite],
and then press the <m> button.
4 Choose the name of the person
to overwrite with.
Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Face Information” (=
43) to choose
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
Erasing Names
Following step 3 in “Changing Names”
(=
109), choose [Erase] and press the
<m> button.
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
Image Viewing Options
Still Images
Magnifying Images
1 Magnify an image.
Moving the zoom lever toward <k> will
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward <g>. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
2 Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
To move the display position, press the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the <7> dial.
• Youcanreturntosingle-imagedisplayfrommagnieddisplaybypressingthe
<n> button.
• You can check the focus when [
] is displayed by pressing the <m>
button to enlarge the AF frame position (Focus Check). Press the <m> button
repeatedly to enlarge any other AF frames displayed.
Approximate Position of
Displayed Area
110
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Viewing Slideshows
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
1 Access the setting screen.
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [1] tab
(=
25).
2 Congurethesetting.
Chooseamenuitemtocongure,and
then choose the desired option (=
25).
3 Start automatic playback.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Start], and then
press the <m> button.
The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
Press the <n> button to stop the
slideshow.
• The camera’s power-saving functions (=
21) are deactivated
during slideshows.
• To pause or resume slideshows, press the <m> button.
• You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the <q><r>
buttons or turning the <7> dial. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the
<q><r> buttons down.
Still Images
Auto Playback of Related Images
(Smart Shufe)
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera
offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in
many kinds of scenes.
1 ChooseSmartShufe.
Press the <n> button, choose
[SmartShufe]onthe[1] tab, and then
press the <m> button (=
25).
Four candidate images are displayed.
2 Choose an image.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose the image you want to view next.
Your chosen image is displayed in the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
For full-screen display of the center
image, press the <m> button. To restore
the original display, press the <m>
button again.
Press the <n> button to restore
single-image display.
111
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• Only still images shot with this camera are played back using Smart
Shufe.
• SmartShufeisnotavailableinthefollowingcases:
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
- An unsupported image is currently displayed
- Imagesareshowninltereddisplay(=
106)
- During group playback (=
108)
Still Images Movies
Protecting Images
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera
(=
114).
Choosing a Selection Method
1 Access the setting screen.
Press the <n> button and choose
[Protect] on the [1] tab (=
25).
2 Choose a selection method.
Choose a menu item and an option as
desired (=
25).
To return to the menu screen, press the
<n> button.
• Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format the
card (=
153, 154).
• Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure function. To
erasethemthisway,rstcancelprotection.
112
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Choosing Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (=
111), choose [Select] and
press the <m> button.
2 Choose an image.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button. [
] is displayed.
To cancel selection, press the <m>
button again. [
] is no longer displayed.
Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3 Protect the image.
Press the <n> button. A
conrmationmessageisdisplayed.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
• Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn
thecameraoffbeforenishingthesetupprocessinstep3.
Selecting a Range
1 Choose [Select Range].
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (=
111), choose [Select
Range] and press the <m> button.
2 Choose a starting image.
Press the <m> button.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
3 Choose an ending image.
Press the <r> button to choose [Last
image], and then press the <m> button.
113
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
Imagesbeforetherstimagecannotbe
selected as the last image.
4 Protect the images.
Press the <p> button to choose
[Protect], and then press the <m>
button.
• Youcanalsochoosetherstorlastimagebyturningthe<7> dial when the
top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
Specifying All Images at Once
1 Choose [Select All Images].
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (=
111), choose [Select All
Images] and press the <m> button.
2 Protect the images.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Protect], and then
press the <m> button.
• To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4 of
“Selecting a Range” or in step 2 of “Specifying All Images at Once”.
114
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (=
111) cannot be erased.
1 Choose an image to erase.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
2 Erase the image.
Press the <a> button.
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the <m>
button.
The current image is now erased.
To cancel erasure, press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the <m>
button.
• Pressing the <a> button while [ ] images are displayed will give you
the option of choosing [Erase
], [Erase JPEG], or [Erase +JPEG] for
deletion.
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when erasing
images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images
(=
111) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1 Access the setting screen.
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [1] tab (=
25).
2 Choose a selection method.
Choose a menu item and an option as
desired (=
25).
To return to the menu screen, press the
<n> button.
115
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Choosing Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (=
114), choose [Select] and
press the <m> button.
2 Choose an image.
Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(=
112), [ ] is displayed.
To cancel selection, press the <m>
button again. [
] is no longer displayed.
Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3 Erase the image.
Press the <n> button. A
conrmationmessageisdisplayed.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Selecting a Range
1 Choose [Select Range].
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (=
114), choose [Select
Range] and press the <m> button.
2 Choose images.
Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(=
112) to specify images.
3 Erase the images.
Press the <p> button to choose [Erase],
and then press the <m> button.
Specifying All Images at Once
1 Choose [Select All Images].
Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (=
114), choose [Select All
Images] and press the <m> button.
2 Erase the images.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
116
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Rotating Images
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1 Choose [Rotate].
Press the <n> button and choose
[Rotate] on the [1] tab (=
25).
2 Rotate the image.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the <m> button.
To return to the menu screen, press the
<n> button.
• Movieswithanimagequalityof[
], [ ], or [ ] cannot
be rotated.
• Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off] (=
116).
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
Press the <n> button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [1] tab, and then choose
[Off] (=
25).
• Images cannot be rotated (=
116) when you set [Auto Rotate] to
[Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in the
original orientation.
• InSmartShufe(=
110) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set to
[Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and rotated
images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.
117
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Tagging Images as Favorites
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
categoryinlteredplayback,youcanrestrictthefollowingoperationstoall
of those images.
• Viewing (=
102), Viewing Slideshows (=
110), Protecting Images
(=
111), Erasing Images (=
114), Adding Images to the Print List
(DPOF) (=
180), Adding Images to a Photobook (=
182)
1 Choose [Favorites].
Press the <n> button and choose
[Favorites] on the [1] tab (=
25).
2 Choose an image.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button. [
] is displayed.
To untag the image, press the <m>
button again. [
] is no longer displayed.
Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
3 Finish the setup process.
Press the <n> button. A
conrmationmessageisdisplayed.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
• Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
modeorturnthecameraoffbeforenishingthesetupprocessin
step 3.
• Favorite images will have a three-star rating ( ) when transferred
to computers running Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista. (Does not
apply to movies or RAW images.)
118
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Convenient Control Using the < >
Button
Youcanquicklyandeasilyactivatefunctionsthatyouassigntothe< >
button.
1 Choose [Set Shortcut button].
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Set Shortcut button] on the [1]
tab (=
25).
2 Congurethesetting.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose a function to assign,
and then press the <m> button.
3 Use the assigned function as
needed.
Press the < > button to activate the
assigned function.
• To restore default settings, choose [ ].
• When [2] is assigned and you press the <
> button while the camera is not
connected to the printer, the image is designated for printing and will be printed
once the printer is connected.
Editing Still Images
• Image editing (=
118 – 121) is only available when the memory
cardhassufcientfreespace.
Still Images
Resizing Images
Save a copy of images at a lower resolution.
1 Choose [Resize].
Press the <n> button and choose
[Resize] on the [1] tab (=
25).
2 Choose an image.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
3 Choose an image size.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose the size, and then
press the <m> button.
[Save new image?] is displayed.
4 Save the new image.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Theimageisnowsavedasanewle.
119
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
5 Review the new image.
Press the <n> button. [Display new
image?] is displayed.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Yes], and then press
the <m> button.
The saved image is now displayed.
•
Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ] (
=
45)
or saved as [ ] in step 3.
• RAW images cannot be edited.
• Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.
Still Images
Cropping
Youcanspecifyaportionofanimagetosaveasaseparateimagele.
1 Choose [Cropping].
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Cropping] on the [1] tab
(=
25).
2 Choose an image.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
3 Adjust the cropping area.
A frame is displayed around the portion of
the image to be cropped.
The original image is shown in the upper
left, and a preview of the image as
cropped is shown in the lower right.
To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
To move the frame, press the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
To change the frame orientation, press
the <m> button.
Faces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left
image. To crop the image based on this
frame, turn the <7> dial to switch to the
other frame.
Press the <n> button.
4 Save as a new image and
review.
Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(=
118 – 119).
•
Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ] (
=
45)
or resized to [ ] (
=
118).
• RAW images cannot be edited.
• Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping.
• Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped images.
• If you crop still images shot using Face ID (=
39), only the names of the
people left in the cropped image will remain.
Resolution After Cropping
Preview of Image After
Cropping
Cropping Area
120
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate
le.Fordetailsoneachoption,see“ChangingImageColorTones(My
Colors)” (=
75).
1 Choose [My Colors].
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [1] tab
(=
25).
2 Choose an image.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
3 Choose an option.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
4 Save as a new image and
review.
Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(=
118 – 119).
• Imagequalityofpicturesyourepeatedlyeditthiswaywillbealittle
lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired
color.
• Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.
• The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly from the color
of images shot using My Colors (=
75).
Still Images
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detectedandautomaticallyadjustedtotheoptimalbrightness.Insufcient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
imageasaseparatele.
1 Choose [i-Contrast].
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [i-Contrast] on the [1] tab
(=
25).
2 Choose an image.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
3 Choose an option.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
4 Save as a new image and
review.
Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(=
118 – 119).
• For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
• Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
• RAW images cannot be edited this way.
121
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting images using
[Low], [Medium], or [High].
Still Images
Correcting Red-Eye
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
correctedimageasaseparatele.
1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [1]
tab (=
25).
2 Choose an image.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
3 Correct the image.
Press the <m> button.
Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(=
109).
4 Save as a new image and
review.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose [New File],
and then press the <m> button.
Theimageisnowsavedasanewle.
Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images”
(=
119).
• Some images may not be corrected accurately.
• To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased.
• Protected images cannot be overwritten.
• RAW images cannot be edited this way.
• Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shot in [
], but
the original image cannot be overwritten.
122
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Movies
Editing Movies
You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end.
1 Choose [*].
Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(=
102), choose [*] and press the
<m> button.
The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
2 Specify portions to cut.
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose
[
] or [ ].
To view the portions you can cut
(identiedby[
] on the screen), press
the <q><r> buttons or turn the <7>
dial to move [
]. Cut the beginning of the
movie (from [
]) by choosing [ ], and
cut the end of the movie by choosing
[
].
If you move [ ] to a position other than a
[
] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
nearest [
] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [
] the portion after the nearest
[
] mark on the right will be cut.
Movie Editing Panel
Movie Editing Bar
3 Review the edited movie.
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose
[
], and then press the <m> button.
The edited movie is now played.
To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
To cancel editing, press the <o><p>
buttons to choose [
]. Press the <m>
button, choose [OK] (either press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial),
and then press the <m> button again.
4 Save the edited movie.
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose
[
], and then press the <m> button.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose [New File],
and then press the <m> button.
Themovieisnowsavedasanewle.
Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the <m> button.
123
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Movies
Editing Digest Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (=
31) recorded in [ ] mode can be erased, as
needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be recovered.
1 Select the clip to erase.
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Images (Digest Movies)” (=
104) to
play a movie created in [
] mode, and
then press the <m> button to access the
movie control panel.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [
] or [ ], and then
press the <m> button.
2 Choose [ ].
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [
], and then press
the <m> button.
The selected clip is played back repeatedly.
3 Conrmerasure.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
• [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is connected to a
printer.
• To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite]
in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased.
• Ifthememorycardlackssufcientspace,only[Overwrite]willbe
available.
• Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
• When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack or
an AC adapter kit (sold separately, =
160).
Reducing File Sizes
Movielesizescanbereducedbycompressingmoviesasfollows.
On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [
]. Choose [New File],
and then press the <m> button.
Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the <m> button.
• Compressed movies are saved in [ ] format.
• [
] movies cannot be compressed.
• Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you choose
[Overwrite].
• However,youcancompressandsaveeditedmoviesasnewlesbychoosing
[Compress & Sav.].
124
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible devices, and use the camera
with Web services
7
What You Can Do with Wi-Fi .........................125
Preparing to Share Images via Wi-Fi ............126
Uploading Images to Web Services .................... 126
Sending Images to a Smartphone .......................126
Sending Images to Another Camera ................... 126
Sending Images to a Computer ..........................127
Printing Images Wirelessly ..................................127
Registering Web Services ............................. 127
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY .............128
Registering Other Web Services ......................... 130
Installing CameraWindow on a
Smartphone ...................................................130
Preparing to Register a Computer ................131
Checking Your Computer Environment ............... 131
Installing the Software .........................................131
ConguringtheComputerforaWi-FiConnection
(Windows Only) ...................................................133
Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu .............................133
Initial Connection via Wi-Fi ..................................133
After the Initial Wi-Fi Connection .........................134
Connecting via an Access Point ...................134
ConrmingAccessPointCompatibility ................134
Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points .. 135
Connecting to Access Points in the List .............. 138
Connecting without an Access Point ...........139
Previous Access Points .......................................140
Connecting to Another Camera ....................141
Sending Images ..............................................142
Sending Images Individually ...............................142
Sending Multiple Images .....................................143
Adding Comments ...............................................143
Saving Images to a Computer .......................144
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync) .................................................145
Initial Preparations ..............................................145
Sending Images ..................................................146
Geotagging Images on the Camera ..............146
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings .................147
Editing Connection Information ........................... 147
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ...............148
125
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Connecting to a Computer
Use the software to wirelessly send images from the camera to
a computer.
Connecting to a Printer
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer
(supporting DPS over IP) to print them.
• Before using Wi-Fi, be sure to read “Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Precautions” (=
210) and “Security Precautions” (=
211).
What You Can Do with Wi-Fi
This camera is an approved Wi-Fi
®
* product. You can wirelessly connect to
and send images to the following devices and services.
Note that, in this chapter, wireless LAN functions other than Wi-Fi may be
referred to as Wi-Fi.
* Wi-Fiisabrandnamethatindicatesinteroperabilitycerticationofwireless
LAN devices.
Connecting to Web Services
Images can be sent to social network services and other Web
services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY*. Unsent images on
the camera can also be sent automatically to a computer or
Web service via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
* CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is an online photo service available to
those who have purchased this product.
Connecting to a Smartphone
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that
have Wi-Fi functions. You can also geotag your shots from a
connected smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and
other compatible devices are collectively referred to as
“smartphones”.
Connecting to Another Camera
Use the Wi-Fi function to send images between Canon-brand,
compact digital cameras.
126
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Preparing to Share Images via Wi-Fi
SendingimagesviaWi-Firequiressomeinitialpreparationonthecamera
and target devices. Preparations and methods of sending images vary
depending on the destination.
Note that before using Wi-Fi (=
133), you will need to register a camera
nickname on the camera.
Uploading Images to Web Services
SNS, video-
sharing sites,
e-mail
Access point
Camera
Computer or smartphone
browsers
CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY
Register Web services (=
127)
Connect via an access point (=
134)
Send images (=
142)*
* You can send images to a computer or Web service (=
145).
Sending Images to a Smartphone
Internet
Smartphone
Tablet computer
Access point
Camera
CameraWindow
Install CameraWindow on a smartphone (=
130)
Connect directly (=
139) or via an access point (=
134)
Send images (=
142)
Sending Images to Another Camera
Camera Camera
Connect to another camera (=
141)
Send images (=
142)
127
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Sending Images to a Computer
Camera
Computer
Access point
Internet
CameraWindow
Check your computer environment (=
131)
Install CameraWindow on a computer (=
131)
CongurethecomputerforaWi-Ficonnection(Windowsonly,=
133)
Connect via an access point (=
134)
Save images to a computer (=
144)
Printing Images Wirelessly
Camera
Printer
Access point
Connect directly (=
139) or via an access point (=
134)
Print images (=
176)
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that you
want to use.
• A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
requiredtocompletecamerasettingsforCANONiMAGEGATEWAYand
other Web services.
• Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(MicrosoftInternetExplorer,etc.)requirements,includingsettingsand
version information.
• For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/
cig/).
• You must have an account with Web services other than CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check the
websites for each Web service you want to register.
• Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
128
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
4 Choose [ ].
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose [
], and
then press the <m> button.
5 Establish a connection with the
access point.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Authenticate], and
then press the <m> button.
6 Choose an access point.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose a network (access
point), and then press the <m> button.
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
1 Log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY and access the
camera settings page.
From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ and visit the
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY site for your
region.
Access the camera settings page.
Once the login screen is displayed,
enter your user name and password
to log in. If you do not have a CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow
the instructions to complete member
registration (free of charge).
2 Choose your camera model.
On this camera model, [ ] is displayed
in the Wi-Fi menu.
Once you choose the model, a page is
displayed for entering the authentication
code. On this page in step 9, you will
enter the authentication code displayed
on the camera after steps 3 – 8.
3 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
On the camera, access the Wi-Fi menu
(=
133).
129
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
7 Enter the access point
password.
Press the <m> button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(=
135).
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Next], and then
press the <m> button.
8 Choose [Auto] and establish the
connection.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Auto], and then
press the <m> button.
Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,
an authentication code is displayed.
9 Enter the authentication code.
On the smartphone or computer, enter
the authentication code displayed on the
camera and go to the next step.
Asix-digitconrmationnumberis
displayed.
10
Checktheconrmation
numbers and complete the
setup process.
Makesuretheconrmationnumberon
the camera matches the number on the
smartphone or computer.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Complete the setup process on the
smartphone or computer.
[ ] (=
145) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations, and the [
] icon changes
to [
].
A message is displayed on the
smartphone or computer to indicate that
thisprocessisnished.Toaddother
Web services, follow the procedure
in “Registering Other Web Services”
(=
130) from step 2.
• You can connect to WPS-compatible access points by choosing [WPS
Connection] in step 6. For details, see steps 6 – 8 in “Connecting to WPS-
Compatible Access Points” (=
136).
130
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the
camerarst(=
128).
1 Access the Web service
settings screen.
Follow step 1 in “Registering CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY” (=
128) to log in
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then
access the Web service settings screen.
2 ConguretheWebserviceyou
want to use.
Follow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
3 Choose [ ].
Access the Wi-Fi menu (=
133), choose
[
] (either press the <o><p><q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button.
The Web service settings are now
updated.
• Ifanyconguredsettingschange,followthesestepsagaintoupdatethe
camera settings.
Installing CameraWindow on a
Smartphone
Beforeconnectingyourcameratoasmartphone,rstinstallthefree
dedicated application, CameraWindow, on your smartphone.
1 Connect the smartphone to a
network.
2 Install CameraWindow.
For an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch,
download and install CameraWindow
from the App Store.
For an Android device, download and
install CameraWindow from Google Play.
After installation, use the camera
to establish a connection with the
smartphone (=
134, 139).
• For details on this application (supported smartphones and included functions),
refer to the Canon website.
131
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Preparing to Register a Computer
Prepare to register a computer. To save images to the computer wirelessly,
you must install CameraWindow.
Checking Your Computer Environment
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following
operatingsystems.Fordetailedsystemrequirementsandcompatibility
information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon
website.
Operating
System
Windows Macintosh
Windows 8
Windows 7 SP1
Mac OS X 10.6.8
Mac OS X 10.7
Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later
• Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
• Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
requireaseparatedownloadandinstallationofWindowsMedia
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.
What you will need:
Computer
USB cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
* A USB cable is not included. Although you can install the software without using a
cable, some features will not be added.
1 Download the software.
With a computer connected to the
Internet, access http://www.canon.com/
icpd/.
Access the site for your country or region.
Download the software.
2 Begin the installation.
Click [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
132
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
3 When a message is displayed
prompting you to connect the
camera, choose whether to
connect or not.
When Connecting the Camera to
the Computer
With the camera turned off, open the
cover (
). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (
).
Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
Turn the camera on, and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
Without Connecting the Camera
Select [Install without connecting
the device] and follow the on-screen
instructions to complete the installation
process.
4 Installtheles.
Installation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
After installation when the camera is
connected to the computer, turn the
camera off before disconnecting the
cable.
• Using the software, you can update to the latest version, and download new
functions via the Internet (some software excluded).
• Thersttimeyouconnectthecameratothecomputer,driverswillbeinstalled,
so it may take a few minutes until camera images are accessible.
• Because the content and functions of software vary according to the camera
model, if you have several cameras, you must use each camera to update to
its latest version of the software.
133
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi
Connection (Windows Only)
OnacomputerrunningWindows,congurethefollowingsettingsbefore
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1 Conrmthatthecomputeris
connected to the access point.
For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2 Congurethesetting.
Click in the following order: [Start] menu
►
[All Programs]
►
[Canon Utilities]
►
[CameraWindow]
►
[Wi-Fi connection
setup].
In the application that opens, follow the
on-screeninstructionsandcongurethe
setting.
• ThefollowingWindowssettingsareconguredwhenyouruntheutilityin
step 2.
- Turn on media streaming.
Thiswillenablethecameratosee(nd)thecomputertoaccessviaWi-Fi.
- Turn on network discovery.
Thiswillenablethecomputertosee(nd)thecamera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other automatically.
• Some security software may prevent you from completing the settings as
described here. Check the settings of your security software.
Accessing the Wi-Fi Menu
Initial Connection via Wi-Fi
To start with, register a camera nickname.
This nickname will be displayed on the screen of target devices when
connecting to other devices via Wi-Fi.
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
Press the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
Press the < > button.
2 Enter a nickname.
Press the <m> button to access the
keyboard, and then enter a nickname
(=
26).
Up to 16 characters can be used.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
The Wi-Fi menu is displayed.
134
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• When connecting wirelessly to any device other than a computer, a memory
card must be inserted in the camera. Additionally, the memory card must
contain images in order for you to access Web services or connect to a
smartphone or printer wirelessly.
• To change the camera’s nickname, choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab, and
then choose [Change Device Nickname].
• Nicknames beginning with a space cannot be entered in step 2. If you attempt
to do this and press the <n> button on the keyboard screen, a message
will be displayed. Press the <m> button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
After the Initial Wi-Fi Connection
• Once you have connected to devices via Wi-Fi, recent destinations will
belistedrstwhenyouaccesstheWi-Fimenubypressingthe<
>
button. You can easily connect again by pressing the <o><p> buttons
to choose the device name and then pressing the <m> button.
• To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
<q><r>buttons,andthencongurethesetting.
• If you prefer not to display recent target devices, press the <n> button,
and on the [3]tab,choose[Wi-FiSettings]►[TargetHistory]►[Off].
Connecting via an Access Point
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Conrming Access Point Compatibility
ConrmthattheWi-FirouterorbasestationconformstotheWi-Fi
standardsin“Specications”(=
203).
IfyouarealreadyusingWi-Fi,conrmthefollowingitems.Forinstructions
on checking network settings, refer to the access point user manual.
• If system administrator status is needed to adjust network settings,
contact the system administrator for details.
• These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequatecautionwhenchangingthesesettings.
135
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Check sheet
Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use.
Also called the “access point name” or “network name”.
Network authentication / data encryption (encryption
method / encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission.
○None
○WEP(opensystem
authentication)
○WPA-PSK(TKIP)
○WPA-PSK(AES)
○WPA2-PSK(TKIP)
○WPA2-PSK(AES)
Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless
transmission. Also called the “encryption key” or “network
key”.
Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication /
data encryption.
○1
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point supports
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) or not. Refer to the user manual provided with
your access point to check if it supports WPS.
• A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for connecting
multiple computers. A router that contains an internal Wi-Fi function is called a
“Wi-Fi router”.
• This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access points”.
• IfyouuseMACaddresslteringonyourWi-Finetwork,besuretoaddthe
camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can check your camera’s
MAC address by choosing the [3] tab, [Wi-Fi Settings], and then [Check MAC
Address].
Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi.YoucanuseeitherPushButtonCongurationMethodorPINMethod
for settings on a WPS supported device.
1 Conrmthatthetargetdeviceis
connected to the access point.
Thisstepisnotrequiredwhenconnecting
to Web services.
For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2 Access the Wi-Fi menu
(=
133).
3 Choose the target device.
Choose the target device (either press
the <o><p><q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
To connect to a smartphone, choose [ ].
To connect to a computer, choose [ ].
To connect to a printer, choose [2].
To connect to a Web service, choose
the service icon. If multiple recipients
or sharing options are used with a Web
service, choose the desired item on the
[Select Recipient] screen (either press
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <7>
dial), and then press the <m> button.
136
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
4 Choose [Add a Device].
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
5 To connect to a smartphone or
printer:
Choose [Switch Network].
When the [Waiting to connect] screen
is displayed (=
139), choose [Switch
Network] (either press the <q><r>
buttons or turn the <7> dial), and then
press the <m> button.
6 Choose [WPS Connection].
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [WPS Connection],
and then press the <m> button.
7 Choose [PBC Method].
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [PBC Method], and
then press the <m> button.
8 Establish the connection.
On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
On the camera, press the <m> button.
The camera will connect to the access
point.
If you have selected [ ], [2], or [ ] in
step 3, devices connected to the access
point are listed on the [Select a Device]
screen displayed next.
If you have selected a Web service in
step 3, go to step 11.
9 To connect to a smartphone,
printer, or computer:
Choose the target device.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose the computer name,
and then press the <m> button.
If you have selected a smartphone,
printer, or Macintosh computer, go to
step 11.
137
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
10
If you have selected a computer
running Windows in step 9 for
thersttime:
Install a driver.
When the screen at left is displayed on
the camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
Double-click the connected camera icon.
Driver installation will begin.
After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
11
Send or print the images.
The screen displayed when the devices
are connected varies depending on the
target device.
When the camera is connected to a
smartphone or Web service, an image
transfer screen is displayed. For
instructions on sending images, see
“Sending Images” (=
142).
When the camera is connected to a
computer, the camera screen is blank.
Follow the steps in “Saving Images to a
Computer” (=
144) to save images to
the computer.
When the camera is connected to a
printer, you can print by following the
same steps as for printing via USB. For
details, see “Printing Images” (=
176).
• If you chose [PIN Method] in step 7, a PIN code will be displayed on the
screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point. Choose a device in the
[Select a Device] screen. For further details, refer to the user manual included
with your access point.
• Toaddmultipledestinations,repeatthisprocedurefromtherststep.
138
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following
step 4 in “Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points” (=
136).
• Toreconnecttotheaccesspoint,conrmthatthetargetdeviceisalready
connected to it, and then follow the procedure from step 9. Note that this
stepisnotrequiredwhenconnectingtoWebservices.
• To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure from step 6.
Connecting to Access Points in the List
1 View the listed access points.
View the listed networks (access
points) as described in steps 1 – 5 of
“Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access
Points” (=
135 – 136).
2 Choose an access point.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose a network (access
point), and then press the <m> button.
3 Enter the access point
password.
Press the <m> button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(=
135).
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Next], and then
press the <m> button.
4 Choose [Auto].
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Auto], and then
press the <m> button.
If you selected [ ], [2], or [ ] as the
target device, see “Connecting to WPS-
Compatible Access Points”, starting with
step 9 (=
136).
If you selected a Web service as the
destination, see “Connecting to WPS-
Compatible Access Points”, starting with
step 11 (=
137).
• To determine the access point password, check on the access point itself or
refer to the user manual.
• Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are detected,
choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to manually set an access point. Follow on-
screen instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.
• When you use an access point that you have already connected to for
connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the password in step 3. To
use the same password, choose [Next] (either press the <o><p> buttons or
turn the <7> dial) and press the <m> button.
139
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Connecting without an Access Point
When connecting to a smartphone or printer via Wi-Fi, you can use the
camera as an access point (Camera Access Point mode) instead of using
another access point.
Similarly, no access point is used in camera-to-camera connections
(=
141).
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu
(=
133).
2 Choose the target device.
Choose the target device (either press
the <o><p><q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
To connect to a smartphone, choose [ ].
To connect to a printer, choose [2].
3 Choose [Add a Device].
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
The camera’s SSID is displayed.
4 On the target device, connect
tothenetworkidentiedonthe
camera.
In the smartphone or printer’s Wi-Fi
setting menu, choose the SSID (network
name) displayed on the camera.
5 For a smartphone connection:
Start CameraWindow on the
smartphone.
ThersttimeCameraWindowstarts
up, register a smartphone nickname for
display on the camera.
Once the smartphone is recognized on
the camera, the device connection screen
will be displayed on the camera.
6 Choose the target device.
Choose the target device name (either
press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
140
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
7 For a smartphone connection:
Adjust the privacy setting.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Yes], and then press
the <m> button.
You can now use the smartphone to
receive images sent from the camera,
or to geotag images on the camera
(=
146).
8 Send or print the images.
The screen displayed when the devices
are connected varies depending on the
target device.
When the camera is connected to a
smartphone, an image transfer screen
is displayed. For instructions on sending
images, see “Sending Images” (=
142).
When the camera is connected to a
printer, you can print by following the
same steps as for printing via USB. For
details, see “Printing Images” (=
176).
• All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 7. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone,
choose [No] in step 7.
• To change privacy settings for smartphones added to the list,
choose the smartphone whose settings you want to change from
[Edit a Device] in step 3, and then choose [View Settings].
• Toaddmultipledevices,repeatthisprocedurefromtherststep.
• Forbettersecurity,youcanrequirepasswordinputonthescreeninstep3
by accessing MENU and choosing [3]tab►[Wi-FiSettings]►[Password]
►[On].Inthiscase,inthepasswordeldonthedeviceinstep4,enterthe
password displayed on the camera.
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following
step 3 in “Connecting without an Access Point” (=
139).
• To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose [Set
Camera As Access Point].
• When reconnecting via a previous access point, connect the target
device to the access point in step 4.
• To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Connecting to WPS-Compatible Access Points” from step 6
(=
136).
141
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Connecting to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as follows.
• OnlyCanon-brandcamerasequippedwithaWi-Fifunctioncanbeconnected
to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-Fi cards cannot
be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function. You cannot connect to
PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS
cameras with this camera.
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu
(=
133).
2 Choose camera.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose [4], and
then press the <m> button.
3 Choose [Add a Device].
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Add a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
When the target camera has been added
successfully, the image transfer screen
will be displayed. Proceed to “Sending
Images” (=
142).
• To add multiple cameras, repeat the above procedures starting from step 1.
• Once a camera is added, the camera name will be displayed on the screen in
step 3. To connect to a camera again, simply choose the camera name from
the list.
142
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Sending Images
Send images wirelessly to destinations registered on the camera as follows.
Note that when images are sent to a computer, the computer is used
instead of the camera (=
144).
Sending Images Individually
1 Choose an image.
Turn the <7> dial to choose an image
to send.
2 Send the image.
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the
<m> button.
When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the <m> button.
Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
After images are uploaded to a Web
service, [OK] is displayed. Press the
<m> button to return to the playback
screen.
After sending images to a camera or
smartphone, [Transfer completed] will be
displayed, and the display will return to
the image transfer screen.
• For movies that you do not compress (=
123), a separate,
compressedleissentinsteadoftheoriginalle.Notethatthis
maydelaytransmission,andthelecannotbesentunlessthereis
enough space for it on the memory card.
• KeepyourngersorotherobjectsofftheWi-Fiantennaarea(=
4).
Covering this may decrease the speed of your image transfers.
• Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take a long
time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera battery level.
• Whensendingmoviestosmartphones,notethatthesupportedimagequality
varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the smartphone user
manual.
• To disconnect from the camera, press the <n> button, choose [OK] on
theconrmationscreen(eitherpressthe<q><r> buttons or turn the <7>
dial), and then press the <m> button. You can also use the smartphone to
end the connection.
• On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following icons.
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
• Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending images
you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Choosing the Image Resolution (Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the <o><p>
buttons, and then press the <m> button. On the next screen, choose the
resolution by pressing the <o><p> buttons, and then press the <m>
button.
• To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
• Choosing [ ] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected
size before sending.
• Movies cannot be resized.
143
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. Only one movie can be sent.
• Moviesuptoveminutes(ordigestmoviesupto13minutes)canbesent.
• Web services may limit the number of images you can send. For details, refer
to the Web service you are using.
• You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom lever twice toward
<k> to access single-image display and then pressing the <q><r> buttons or
turning the <7> dial.
• In step 3, you can choose the desired resolution (size) of your images before
sending (=
45).
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to
e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of characters
and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web service.
1 Access the screen for adding
comments.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose [
], and then press the <m>
button.
2 Add a comment (=
26).
3 Send the image.
Follow the steps in “Sending Images
Individually” (=
142) to send the image.
• When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is automatically sent.
Sending Multiple Images
1 Choose [Select and send].
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the
<m> button.
2 Choose images.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons to
choose an image to send, and then press
the <m> button. [
] is displayed.
To cancel selection, press the <m>
button again. [
] is no longer displayed.
Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
Afteryounishchoosingimages,press
the <n> button.
3 Send the images.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Send], and then
press the <m> button.
144
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• Movieswilltakelongertoimportsincethelesizeislargerthanstillimages.
• To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
• You can also specify to save all images or only selected images to the
computer, and you can change the destination folder. Refer to “Software
Instruction Manual” (=
173) for details.
• In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [
] icon in the
taskbar.
• If CameraWindow is not displayed when using a Macintosh computer, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
• Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your
camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations
apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until
camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be
saved.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information,
depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image
lesizes.
- Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as
movie editing.
Saving Images to a Computer
When sending images to a computer, use the computer instead of the
camera.
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some
software excluded).
1 Display CameraWindow.
In Windows, access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
On a Macintosh computer,
CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
2 Import images.
Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete. For
instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to “Software Instruction
Manual” (=
173).
145
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
3 Choose the type of images
to send (only when sending
movies with images).
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab
(=
25).
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the
<q><r> buttons to choose [Stills/
Movies].
• To choose a Web service as the destination, follow the steps in “Registering
Other Web Services” (=
130) to update the camera settings.
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can be
sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Installandcongurethesoftwareonthedestinationcomputer.
1 Install the software.
Install the software on a computer
connected to the Internet (=
131).
2 Register the camera.
Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
Macintosh: In the menu bar, click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
Choose a source camera from one of
the cameras listed, which are linked to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (=
128).
Once the camera is registered and ready
to receive images, the icon changes to
[
].
146
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow
application (=
130) can be added to images on the camera. Images are
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
• Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home time
zone are set correctly. (See “Setting the Date and Time” (=
14).)
Additionally, in [Time Zone] (=
151), specify any shooting
destinations that are in other time zones.
• The smartphone you will use for geotagging must be authorized to
view the images on the camera (=
140).
• Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. Stored
images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer and
save the images.
Follow the steps in “Connecting to WPS-
Compatible Access Points” (=
135) to
choose [
].
Once the connection is established, the
images are sent.
When the images have been sent
successfully to the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, [
] is displayed on
the screen.
Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
• When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery pack
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, =
160).
• Even if images were imported to the computer through a different method, any
images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY will be sent to
the computer.
• Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same network as
the camera, because images are sent via the access point instead of CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images stored on the computer are sent to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so the computer must be connected to the Internet.
147
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
5 Choose an item to edit.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an item to edit, and
then press the <m> button.
The items you can change depend on
what device or service the camera will
access.
CongurableItems
Connection
4
c
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname] (=
147)
O O O O
–
[View Settings] (=
140)
–
O
– – –
[Erase Connection Info] (=
148)
O O O O
–
O
:Congurable
–
:Notcongurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
Following step 5 in “Editing Connection
Information” (=
147), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the <m>
button.
Selecttheinputeldandpressthe<m>
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (=
26).
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu
(=
133).
2 Choose a device to edit.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons
or turn the <7> dial to choose the icon
of the device to edit, and then press the
<m> button.
3 Choose [Edit a Device].
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Edit a Device], and
then press the <m> button.
4 Choose a device to edit.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose the device to edit,
and then press the <m> button.
148
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the camera
to another person, or dispose of it.
1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [3] tab
(=
25).
2 Choose [Reset Settings].
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Reset Settings], and
then press the <m> button.
3 Restore the default settings.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
• Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be sure
that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
• To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose [Reset All] in the
[3] tab (=
157).
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
Following step 5 in “Editing Connection
Information” (=
147), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the <m>
button.
After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial to
choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
The connection information will be
erased.
149
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience
8
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ..............150
Silencing Camera Operations .............................150
Adjusting the Volume ..........................................150
Customizing Sounds ...........................................150
Hiding Hints and Tips ..........................................151
Date and Time .....................................................151
World Clock ......................................................... 151
Lens Retraction Timing .......................................152
Using Eco Mode ..................................................152
Power-Saving Adjustment ................................... 152
Screen Brightness ...............................................153
Start-Up Screen ..................................................153
Formatting Memory Cards ..................................153
File Numbering ....................................................154
Date-Based Image Storage .................................155
Metric / Non-Metric Display ................................. 155
Electronic Level Calibration .................................155
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images ................................................................156
CheckingCerticationLogos ..............................156
Display Language ...............................................157
Adjusting Other Settings .....................................157
Restoring Defaults ...............................................157
150
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Functionscanbeconguredonthe[3] tab. Customize commonly used
functions as desired, for greater convenience (=
25).
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
Choose [Mute], and then choose [On].
• Operation can also be silenced by holding down the <p> button as you turn
the camera on.
• Sound is not played during movies (=
102) if you mute camera sounds. To
restore sound during movies, press the <o> button. Adjust volume with the
<o><p> buttons, as needed.
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
Choose [Volume], and then press the
<m> button.
Choose an item, and then press the
<q><r> buttons to adjust the volume.
Customizing Sounds
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.
Choose [Sound Options], and then press
the <m> button.
Choose an item, and then press the
<q><r> buttons to choose an option.
• The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [ ] mode (=
31) cannot
be changed.
151
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (=
24) or
MENU (=
25) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
[Off].
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
Choose [Date/Time], and then press the
<m> button.
Press the <q><r> buttons to choose an
option, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the <o><p> buttons or
turning the <7> dial.
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you
travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to that
time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date/
Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (=
14).
1 Specify your destination.
Choose [Time Zone], and then press the
<m> button.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [
World], and then
press the <m> button.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose the destination.
To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), press the <o><p> buttons to
choose [
].
Press the <m> button.
2 Switch to the destination time
zone.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [
World], and then
press the <n> button.
[ ] is now shown on the shooting screen
(=
191).
• Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (=
15) will automatically
update your [
Home] time and date.
152
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the <1> button in Shooting mode (=
21). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the <1> button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
Choose [Lens Retract], and then choose
[0 sec.].
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode. When
thecameraisnotinuse,thescreenquicklydarkenstoreducebattery
consumption.
1 Congurethesetting.
Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose
[On].
[ ] is now shown on the shooting
screen (=
191).
The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
2 Shoot.
To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto Power
Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (=
21).
Choose [Power Saving], and then press
the <m> button.
After choosing an item, press the
<q><r> buttons to adjust it as needed.
• To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
• The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power Down] to [Off].
• These power-saving functions are not available when you have set Eco mode
(=
152) to [On].
153
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Screen Brightness
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
Choose [LCD Brightness], and then
press the <q><r> buttons to adjust the
brightness.
• For maximum brightness, press and hold the <p> button for at least one
second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-image display.
(This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting on the [3] tab.) To restore
the original brightness, press and hold the <p> button again for at least one
second or restart the camera.
Start-Up Screen
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as
follows.
Choose [Start-up Image], and then press
the <m> button.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option.
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you
should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images
on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.
1 Access the [Format] screen.
Choose [Format], and then press the
<m> button.
2 Choose [OK].
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose
[Cancel], choose [OK] (either press the
<q><r> buttons or turn the <7> dial),
and then press the <m> button.
3 Format the memory card.
To begin the formatting process, press
the <o><p> buttons or turn the <7>
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
<m> button.
Whenformattingisnished,[Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the <m> button.
• Formattingorerasingdataonamemorycardonlychangesle
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards, take
steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically
destroying cards.
154
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than
the advertised capacity.
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in these cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing is
slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly stops.
Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-level
formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other
steps to back them up.
On the screen in step 1 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (=
153), press the
<o><p> buttons or turn the <7> dial
to choose [Low Level Format], and then
press the <q><r> buttons to select this
option. A [
] icon is displayed.
Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (=
153) to continue with the
formatting process.
• Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory Cards” (=
153),
because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card.
• You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing [Stop]. In this
case, all data will be erased, but the memory card can be used normally.
File Numbering
Yourshotsareautomaticallynumberedinsequentialorder(0001–9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
howthecameraassignslenumbers.
Choose [File Numbering], and then
choose an option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th shot is taken/
saved) even if you switch memory cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory cards, or
when a new folder is created.
• Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be numbered
consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly inserted
memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001, use an empty (or formatted
(=
153)) memory card.
• Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (=
173) for information on the card
folder structure and image formats.
155
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
Choose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily].
Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (=
29), the MF
indicator (=
78), GPS information for elevation (=
146), and elsewhere
from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].
Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
1 Make sure the camera is level.
Placethecameraonaatsurface,such
as a table.
2 Calibrate the electronic level.
Choose [Electronic Level], and then press
the <m> button.
To adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal
Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/
backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch
Calibration], followed by the <m> button.
Aconrmationmessageisdisplayed.
Choose [OK], and then press the <m>
button.
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
Choose [Electronic Level], and then press
the <m> button.
Choose [Reset], and then press the
<m> button.
Once the electronic level has been reset,
the menu screen is displayed again.
156
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
Choose [Copyright Info], and then press
the <m> button.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <7> dial to choose [Enter Author’s
Name] or [Enter Copyright Details]. Press
the <m> button to access the keyboard,
and enter the name (=
26).
Press the <n> button. When [Accept
changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes]
(either press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial), and then press the <m>
button.
The information set here will now be
recorded in images.
• To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info] on the
screen above, and then press the <m> button.
• You can also use the software (=
173) to enter, change, and delete copyright
information. Some characters entered with the software may not display on the
camera, but will be correctly recorded in images.
• You can check copyright information recorded in images by using the software,
once you save the images to a computer.
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
Follow the steps in “Setting Copyright
Information to Record in Images”
(=
156) and choose [Delete Copyright
Info].
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
• The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
Checking Certication Logos
Somelogosforcerticationrequirementsmetbythecameracanbeviewed
onthescreen.Othercerticationlogosareprintedinthisguide,onthe
camera packaging, or on the camera body.
Choose[CerticationLogoDisplay],and
then press the <m> button.
157
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
Choose [Language ], and then press
the <m> button.
Press the <o><p><q><r> buttons or
turn the <7> dial to choose a language,
and then press the <m> button.
• You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by pressing and
holding the <m> button and immediately pressing the <n> button.
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [3] tab.
• [Video System] (=
165)
• [Ctrl via HDMI] (=
164)
• [Wi-Fi Settings] (=
124)
Restoring Defaults
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
1 Access the [Reset All] screen.
Choose [Reset All], and then press the
<m> button.
2 Restore default settings.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Default settings are now restored.
• The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- Information registered using Face ID (=
39)
- [3] tab settings [Date/Time] (=
151), [Time Zone] (=
151) [Language ]
(=
157), and [Video System] (=
165)
- Custom white balance data you have recorded (=
74)
- Shooting mode chosen in [K] (=
52) or [ ] (=
54) mode
- Exposure compensation (=
68) setting
- Movie mode (=
65)
- Wi-Fi settings (=
124)
- Calibrated value for the electronic level (=
155)
- Copyright information (=
156)
158
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and other compatible
accessories sold separately
9
System Map .................................................... 159
Optional Accessories.....................................160
Power Supplies ...................................................160
Flash Units ..........................................................161
Other Accessories ............................................... 162
Printers ................................................................162
Using Optional Accessories..........................163
Playback on a TV ................................................ 163
Powering the Camera with Household Power .....165
Using a Tele-Converter (Sold Separately) ...........166
Using a Lens Hood ..............................................167
Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately) ...................167
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately) .......... 168
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately) .........169
Using the Software .........................................173
Software .............................................................. 173
Computer Connections via a Cable ....................174
Saving Images to a Computer .............................174
Printing Images .............................................. 176
Easy Print ............................................................176
ConguringPrintSettings ...................................177
Printing Movie Scenes ........................................179
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..............180
Adding Images to a Photobook ........................... 182
159
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
System Map
Neck Strap
Battery Pack
NB-10L*
1
(with terminal cover)
Battery Charger
CB-2LC/CB-2LCE*
1
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
2
Memory Card Card Reader Windows/
Macintosh
Computer
TV/Video
System
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC80
Included Accessories
Power
Cables
HDMI Cable HTC-100
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
Flash Units
Lens Accessories
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible Printers
Speedlite*
4
600EX-RT, 600EX,
580EX II, 430EX II,
320EX, 270EX II
High-Power
Flash
HF-DC2*
3
Macro Twin Lite
MT-24EX*
5
*
6
Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX*
6
Canon-Brand Lens Filter
(58 mm dia.)*
7
Tele-Converter
TC-DC58E*
6
Remote Switch RS-60E3
Other Accessories
Cases
Soft Case
SC-DC85
Waterproof Case
WP-DC52
160
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability
varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-10L
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE
Charger for Battery Pack NB-10L
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80
For powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack in the camera.
• The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
• For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available
adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed
for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).
*3 High-Power Flash HF-DC1 also supported.
*4 These accessories are also supported: Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX, and
220EX, Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2, Speedlite Bracket SB-E2, and Off-Camera
Shoe Cord OC-E3.
*5RequiresBracketBKT-DC1andOff-CameraShoeCordOC-E3.
*6RequiresConversionLensAdapterLA-DC58L.
*7RequiresFilterAdapterFA-DC58D.
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine
Canon accessories.
Canonshallnotbeliableforanydamagetothisproductand/oraccidentssuchasre,
etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage
and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to
repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you
mayrequestsuchrepairsonachargeablebasis.
Note that availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
161
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Flash Units
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
Externalashforilluminatingsubjects
thatareoutofrangeofthebuilt-inash.
High-Power Flash HF-DC1 can also be
used.
Speedlite 600EX-RT, 600EX,
580EX II, 430EX II, 320EX, 270EX II
Shoe-mountedashunitthatenables
manystylesofashphotography.
Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX, and
220EX are also supported.
Speedlite Bracket SB-E2
Prevents unnatural shadows next to
subjects during vertical shooting. Includes
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2
Enables wireless control of slave
Speedliteashunits(exceptSpeedlite
220EX/270EX).
Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX
Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX
Externalmacroashunitthatenables
manystylesofmacroashphotography.
RequiresConversionLensAdapter
LA-DC58L, Off-Camera Shoe Cord
OC-E3, and Bracket BKT-DC1 (all sold
separately) for attachment to the camera.
RequiresConversionLensAdapter
LA-DC58L (sold separately) for
attachment to the camera.
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3
UsedtoattachaMacroTwinLiteashto
the camera.
Bracket BKT-DC1
UsedtoattachaMacroTwinLiteashto
the camera.
162
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Other Accessories
Soft Case SC-DC85
Protects the camera from dust and
scratches.
Handle with care to prevent leather
discoloration.
Waterproof Case WP-DC52
For underwater photography at depths of
up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for
shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on
ski slopes.
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy
playback on the larger TV screen.
HDMI Cable HTC-100
For connecting the camera to an HDMI
inputofahigh-denitionTV.
Tele-Converter TC-DC58E
Optional lens attached to the camera to
increase the focal length by a factor of
approximately 1.4x.
Conversion Lens Adapter
LA-DC58L
AdapterrequiredtoattachtheTele-
converter or Macro Ring Lite/Macro Twin
Liteashtothecamera.
Remote Switch RS-60E3
Enables remote shutter button operation
(pressing the button halfway or all the
way down).
Filter Adapter FA-DC58D
Adapterrequiredwhenmountinga58
mmlter.
Canon Lens Filter (58 mm dia.)
Protects the lens and enables a variety of
shooting effects.
Printers
Canon-Brand PictBridge-
Compatible Printers
Printing images without a computer is
possible by connecting the camera to
a Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible
printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
163
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Using Optional Accessories
Still Images Movies
Playback on a TV
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger
screen of the TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
• Some information may not be displayed on the TV (=
192).
Still Images Movies
PlaybackonaHigh-DenitionTV
Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV.
Movies shot at a resolution of [ ], [ ], or [ ] can be viewed
inhighdenition.
1 Make sure the camera and TV
are off.
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3 Turn the TV on and switch to
video input.
Switch the TV input to the video input you
connected the cable to in step 2.
4 Turn the camera on.
Press the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
Whennished,turnoffthecameraand
TV before disconnecting the cable.
• Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is connected to an
HDTV.
164
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Controlling the Camera with a TV Remote
Connecting the camera to an HDMI CEC-compatible TV enables playback
(including slideshow playback) using the TV remote control.
Depending on the TV, you may need to adjust some TV settings. For
details, refer to the TV manual.
1 Congurethesetting.
Press the <n> button, choose
[Ctrl via HDMI] on the [3] tab, and then
choose [Enable] (=
25).
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Playback on a
High-DenitionTV”(=
163) to connect
the camera to the TV.
3 Display images.
Turn on the TV. On the camera, press the
<1> button.
Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
4 Control the camera with the TV
remote.
Press the <q><r> buttons on the remote
to browse images.
To display the camera control panel,
press the OK/Select button. Select
control panel options by pressing the
<q><r> buttons to choose an option,
and then pressing the OK/Select button
again.
Camera Control Panel Options Shown on the TV
Return Closes the menu.
Group Playback
Displays sets of images, either from continuous shooting
(= 76) in [
G
], [
M
], [
B
], or [
D
] mode (= 67, 92,
or 93) or individual still images saved as source data in
[
] mode (= 63). (Only displayed when a grouped
image is selected.)
Play Movie
Starts movie playback. (Only displayed when a movie
is selected.)
.
Slideshow
Starts slideshow playback. To switch images during
playback, press the <q><r> buttons on the remote
control.
Index Playback Displays multiple images in an index.
l
Change Display
Switches display modes (=
103).
• Pressing buttons, such as the <n> button, on the camera will switch
control to the camera itself, which will prevent remote control until you return to
single-image display.
• The camera may not always respond correctly even if the remote is for an
HDMI CEC-compatible TV.
165
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
PlaybackonaStandard-DenitionTV
Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the
TV as you control the camera.
1 Make sure the camera and TV
are off.
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into
the video inputs as shown.
On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3 Display images.
Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a
High-DenitionTV”(=
163) to display
images.
Red
Red
White
Yellow
Yellow
White
• Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output
format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the
video output format, press the <n> button and choose [Video
System] on the [3] tab.
• When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while previewing
shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow the same steps as when
using the camera screen. However, AF-Point Zoom (=
47), MF-Point
Zoom (=
79), MF Peaking (=
79) and Night Display (=
90) are not
available.
Still Images Movies
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
1 Make sure the camera is off.
2 Connect the adapter to the
coupler.
Insert the adapter plug fully into the
coupler.
3 Insert the coupler.
Follow step 2 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory Card” (=
13) to
open the cover, and then insert the
coupler as shown until it locks into place.
166
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Lower the cover ( ), keeping the coupler
cable in the coupler cable port (
).
Slide the cover ( ) until it clicks into
place.
4 Connect the power cord.
Insert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
Turn the camera on and use it as desired.
Whennished,turnthecameraoffand
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
• Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the
camera.
• Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing so
could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
Coupler Cable Port
Still Images Movies
Using a Tele-Converter (Sold Separately)
Attaching Tele-converter TC-DC58E and Conversion Lens Adapter
LA-DC58L (both sold separately) enables you to use a focal length of 1.4x.
1 Remove the ring.
Make sure the camera is off.
Hold down the ring release button ( )
and turn the ring in the direction of the
arrow (
).
Align the
○
mark on the ring with the
●
mark on the camera, and then lift the
ring off.
2 Attach the conversion lens
adapter.
Align the
○
mark on the conversion lens
adapter with the
●
mark on the camera,
and then turn the adapter in the direction
of the arrows until it locks.
To remove the adapter, hold down the
ring release button and turn the adapter
in the opposite direction.
167
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
3 Attach the tele-converter lens.
Turn the lens in the direction of the arrow
to attach it securely to the camera.
4 Specify the converter in the
camera settings.
Turn the camera on.
Press the <n> button and choose
[Converter] on the [4] tab. Press the
<q><r> buttons to choose [TC-DC58E].
There is no need to adjust the converter
setting when [IS Mode] is set to [Off].
After removing the converter, always
return the converter setting to [None].
• Vignetting may occur (especially in the lower right) when the built-in
ashisused.
• Set the camera to maximum telephoto when using the tele-
converter. At other zoom positions, vignetting may occur.
• Use the LCD monitor to compose shots. The view through the
viewndermaybepartiallyobstructedbyvignetting.
• Before use, remove all dust or debris from the conversion lens with
a lens blower brush.
Still Images Movies
Using a Lens Hood
Attaching the lens hood included with Tele-converter TC-DC58E (sold
separately) can reduce the effect of extraneous light outside the angle of
view when shooting backlit subjects, or when the camera is aimed toward a
bright light source.
Fit the lens hood over the tele-converter
as shown and attach it securely.
When the lens hood will not be used,
attach it inverted.
• Vignettingmayoccurifyouusethebuilt-inashwhenthelenshood
is attached.
Still Images Movies
Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately)
Attachingalensltertothecameraprotectsthelensandallowsyouto
shootwithvariouseffects.Toattachalenslter,youwillneedFilterAdapter
FA-DC58D (sold separately).
1 Remove the ring.
Follow step 1 in “Using a Tele-Converter
(Sold Separately)” (=
166) to remove
the ring.
168
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
2 Attachthelteradapter.
Align the
○
markonthelteradapterwith
the
●
mark on the camera, and then turn
the adapter in the direction of the arrows
until it locks in place.
To remove the adapter, turn off the
camera, hold down the ring release
button, and turn the adapter in the
opposite direction.
3 Attachalter.
Attachtheltertothecamerainthe
direction of the arrow.
• WerecommendtheuseofgenuineCanonlters(58mmdia.).
• When not using auto focus to shoot, set the manual focus option
[Safety MF] to [On].
• Ifyouusethebuilt-inashwiththelteradapterattached,portions
of the image may appear darker.
• Whenusingthelteradapter,besuretouseonlyonelteratatime.
Attachingmultiplelters,oraccessoriessuchasaheavylens,may
cause the attachments to fall off and become damaged.
• Donotgripthelteradaptertightly.
• Removethelteradapterwhennotusingalter.
• Thelteradapterandalenshoodcannotbeattachedtothecameraatthe
same time.
Still Images
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)
An optional Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to avoid camera shake
that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This
optional accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds.
1 Connect the remote switch.
Make sure the camera is off.
Open the terminal cover and insert the
remote switch plug.
2 Shoot.
To shoot, press the release button on the
remote switch.
• Bulb photography (long exposures) is not supported.
169
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)
MoresophisticatedashphotographyispossiblewithanoptionalSpeedlite
EXseriesash.FormovieshootingusinganLEDlight,theoptional
Speedlite320EXashisavailable.
• This camera does not support some Speedlite EX series functions.
• Wireless operation of the Speedlite 600EX-RT is not supported.
• Non-EXseriesCanonashunitsmaynotrecorrectlyormaynot
reatall,insomecases.
• Useofnon-Canonashunits(especiallyhigh-voltageashunits)or
ashaccessoriesmaypreventnormalcameraoperationandmay
damage the camera.
• Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional information.
Still Images Movies
Speedlite EX Series
Theseoptionalashunitscanprovidebrightlightingandmeetavarietyof
ashphotographyneeds.
1 Attachtheash.
Make sure the camera is off, and then
attachtheashunittothehotshoe.
2 Turntheashon,andthenturn
the camera on.
A red [h] icon is now displayed.
Theashpilotlampwilllightupwhenthe
ashisready.
3 Choose shooting mode [G],
[M], [B], or [D].
Flashsettingscanonlybeconguredin
thesemodes.Inothermodes,theash
isadjustedandredautomatically,as
needed.
4 Set the white balance to [h]
(=
74).
5 Conguretheexternalash.
Press the <n> button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [4] tab, and then press
the <m> button.
Optionsalreadysetontheashitselfare
displayed.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <7> dial to choose an item, and
then adjust the setting by pressing the
<q><r> buttons.
Available items vary depending on the
shootingmodeandtheashattached
(=
172).
• Settingsforthebuilt-inashcannotbeconguredwhileaSpeedliteEXseries
ashisattached,becausethatsettingscreenisnolongeraccessible.
• You can also access the setting screen by pressing the <r> button for at least
one second.
• Flash settings in [
]shootingmodecanbeconguredjustastheyarein[G]
mode.
• 600EX-RT/580EXIIonly:[FlashControl]isnotavailableiftheexternalash
hasbeensetupforstroboscopicash.
• 320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie recording or
in Movie mode. In this case, the [
] icon is shown.
170
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately)
Using the optional Speedlite Bracket SB-
E2 can help prevent unnatural shadows
next to subjects during vertical shooting.
Still Images
Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX
Thisoptionalashunitenablesmanystylesofmacroashphotography.
RequiresConversionLensAdapterLA-DC58L(soldseparately)for
attachment to the camera.
1 Prepare the conversion lens
adapter.
Rotate the conversion lens adapter in
the direction indicated by the arrow to
separate the front and back sections.
Only the back section is used to attach
the Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX or Macro
Twin Lite MT-24EX.
Attach to camera
Back
Section
Front
Section
Attach
Detach
2 Remove the ring.
Make sure the camera is off.
Hold down the ring release button ( )
and turn the ring in the direction of the
arrow (
).
Align the
○
mark on the ring with the
●
mark on the camera, and then lift the
ring off.
3 Attach the back section of the
conversion lens adapter.
Align the
○
mark on the back section with
the
●
mark on the camera, and then turn
the adapter in the direction of the arrows
until it locks in place.
To remove the adapter, hold down the
ring release button and turn the adapter
in the opposite direction.
4 Attach the controller to the
camera.
Attach the control component of the
macro ring lite to the hot shoe on top of
the camera.
171
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
5 Attachtheashunittothe
conversion lens adapter.
Press the release buttons on both sides
of the macro ring lite in and attach the
macro ring lite to the conversion lens
adapter.
6 Choose shooting mode [G],
[M], [B], or [D].
Flashsettingscanonlybeconguredin
thesemodes.Inothermodes,theash
isadjustedandredautomatically,as
needed.
7 Set the white balance to [h]
(=
74).
8 Enter [e] mode (=
78).
9 Set [ND Filter] to [On] (=
73).
10
Conguretheexternalash.
Follow step 5 in “Speedlite EX Series”
(=
169) to adjust the settings.
• Keep cords (from the macro ring lite or the off-camera shoe cord)
awayfromashheads.
• When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent the
ashheadsfromcomingintocontactwiththelegs.
• Usethescreentocomposeshots,becausetheviewndercannot
be used with these accessories attached.
Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX
Thisoptionalashunitenablesmanystylesofmacroashphotography.
RequirestheConversionLensAdapterLA-DC58L,Off-CameraShoeCord
OC-E3, and Bracket BKT-DC1 (all sold separately) for attachment to the
camera.
1 Remove the ring and attach the
back section of the conversion
lens adapter.
Follow steps 1 – 3 in “Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX” (=
170) to remove the ring,
and then attach the back section of the
conversion lens adapter.
2 Attach the off-camera shoe cord
to the bracket.
Slide the bracket screw to the outer end
of the bracket. Align the bracket screw
with the tripod socket of the off-camera
shoe cord, and then tighten the screw to
secure it.
3 Attach the bracket to the
camera.
Slide the other bracket screw to the outer
end of the bracket. Align the bracket
screw with the tripod socket on the
bottom of the camera, and then tighten
the screw to secure it.
172
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
4 Attach the off-camera shoe cord
to the camera.
Attach the camera connection component
of the off-camera shoe cord to the hot
shoe on top of the camera.
5 Attach the controller to the off-
camera shoe cord.
Attach the controller for the macro twin
litetotheashconnectioncomponentof
the off-camera shoe cord.
6 Attachtheashunittothe
conversion lens adapter.
Attacheachashheadtotherespective
mount (
). Press the release button on
the top of the ring in and attach the ring to
the conversion lens adapter (
).
7 Conguretheexternalashand
settings on the camera.
Follow steps 6 – 10 in “Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX” (=
171)tocongurethe
settings.
• Keep cords (from the macro twin lite or the off-camera shoe cord)
awayfromashheads.
• When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent the
ashheadsfromcomingintocontactwiththelegsorbracket.
• Usethescreentocomposeshots,becausetheviewndercannot
be used with these accessories attached.
Still Images
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
(Sold Separately)
The following items are available in [G], [M], [B], or [D] mode. In
other shooting modes, only [Red-Eye Corr.] and [Red-Eye Lamp] can be
congured.(Withautoashcontrol,theashalwaysres.)However,external
ashunitsdonotreinmodesthatthebuilt-inashdoesnotre(=
193).
Item Options
Shooting Mode
G M B D
Flash Mode
Auto*
1
O O O
–
Manual*
2
O O O O
Flash Exp. Comp*
3
–3 to +3
O O O
–
Flash Output*
4
1/128*
5
to 1/1 (in 1/3-stop increments)
O O O O
Shutter Sync. 1st-curtain/2nd-curtain/Hi-speed
O O O O
Slow Synchro
On
O O O O
Off
O
–
O
–
Wireless Func.*
6
On/Off
O O O O
Red-Eye Corr. On/Off
O O O O
Red-Eye Lamp On/Off
O O O O
Safety FE*
7
On
O O O
–
Off
O O O O
Clear Flash Settings*
8
O O O O
173
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
*1E-TTLmodeisusedfortheash.
*2Mmodeisusedfortheash.
In [D]shootingmode,E-TTLmodeisalsoavailablefortheash.Inthiscase,when
theashres,ashexposurecompensationsetontheashisappliedtotheash
output level set on the camera.
*3Canbeconguredonlywhen[FlashMode]is[Auto]andashexposure
compensationsetontheashis[+0].Whenyouadjustashexposurecompensation
on 600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II, or 430EX II Speedlites, the camera display will be
updated accordingly.
*4Canbeconguredwhen[FlashMode]is[Manual].Linkedtosettingsontheash
unit.
*5 1/64 for Speedlite 430EX II/430EX/320EX/270EX II/270EX, Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX, and Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX.
*6ForoptionsotherthanOn/Off,congurethesettingontheashunititself.Not
available with Speedlite 430EX II/320EX/270EX II/270EX, Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX,
or Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX. When this item is set to [On], [Shutter Sync.] cannot
be set to [2nd-curtain]. (If [Shutter Sync.] is set to [2nd-curtain], it will be changed to
[1st-curtain].)
*7Canonlybeconguredwhen[FlashMode]is[Auto].
*8 Restores all default settings. You can also restore defaults for [Slow Synchro], [Safety
FE], [Red-Eye Corr.], and [Red-Eye Lamp] by using [Reset All] on the [3] tab on the
camera (=
157).
• Flash settings in [
]shootingmodecanbeconguredjustastheyarein[G]
mode.
• In [
] shooting mode, icons representing Smiling, Sleeping, Babies
(Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children shooting scenes determined by
the camera are not displayed, and the camera does not shoot continuously
(=
34).
Using the Software
The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced
below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer.
Software
After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it, you
can do the following things on your computer.
CameraWindow
Import images and change camera settings
ImageBrowser EX
Manage images: view, search, and organize
Print and edit images
Digital Photo Professional
Browse, process and edit RAW images
• Internetaccessisrequired,andanyISPaccountchargesand
access fees must be paid separately.
Software Instruction Manual
Refer to the instruction manual when using the software. The manual can
be accessed from the help system of software (some software excluded).
174
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed system
requirementsandcompatibilityinformation,includingsupportinnew
operating systems, visit the Canon website.
Operating
System*
Windows Macintosh
Windows 8
Windows 7 SP1
Windows Vista SP2
Windows XP SP3
Mac OS X 10.6
Mac OS X 10.7
Mac OS X 10.8
* WhensendingimagestoacomputerviaWi-Fi,checkthesystemrequirementsin
“Checking Your Computer Environment” (=
131).
• ChecktheCanonwebsiteforthelatestsystemrequirements,including
supported OS versions.
Installing the Software
For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software” (=
131).
Saving Images to a Computer
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software (some
software excluded).
1 Connect the camera to the
computer.
With the camera turned off, open the
cover (
). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (
).
Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
2 Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
Press the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
On a Macintosh computer,
CameraWindow is displayed when a
connection is established between the
camera and computer.
175
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
For Windows, follow the steps introduced
below.
In the screen that displays, click the [ ]
link to modify the program.
Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
Double-click [ ].
3 Save the images to the
computer.
Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the <1> button
to turn the camera off, and unplug the
cable.
For instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to “Software Instruction
Manual” (=
173).
CameraWindow
• In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the
taskbar.
• To start CameraWindow in Windows Vista or XP, click [Downloads Images
From Canon Camera] on the screen displayed when you turn the camera on
in step 2. If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the [Start] menu and choose
[All Programs]
►
[Canon Utilities]
►
[CameraWindow]
►
[CameraWindow].
• On a Macintosh computer, if CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click
the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of the desktop).
• Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your
camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations
apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until
camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be
saved.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information,
depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image
lesizes.
- Some functions provided by the software may not be available, such as
movie editing.
176
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images Movies
Printing Images
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer. On
the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare orders
for photo development services, and prepare orders or print images for
photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Still Images
Easy Print
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (sold separately) with the USB cable.
1 Make sure the camera and
printer are off.
2 Connect the camera to the
printer.
Open the cover. Holding the smaller
cable plug in the orientation shown, insert
the plug fully into the camera terminal.
Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
3 Turn the printer on.
4 Turn the camera on.
Press the <1> button to turn the camera
on.
5 Choose an image.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image.
6 Access the printing screen.
Press the <m> button.
7 Print the image.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [Print], and then
press the <m> button.
Printing now begins.
To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printingisnished.
Whenyouarenishedprinting,turnthe
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
• For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately), see
“Printers” (=
162).
• RAW images cannot be printed.
177
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Conguring Print Settings
1 Access the printing screen.
Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(=
176) to access the screen at left.
2 Congurethesettings.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <7> dial to choose an item, and
then choose an option by pressing the
<q><r> buttons.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No. Printsimageswiththelenumberadded.
Both Printsimageswithboththedateandlenumberadded.
Off
–
Default Matches current printer settings.
Off
–
On
Uses information from the time of shooting to print under
optimal settings.
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
No. of Copies Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print (=
177).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details
(=
178).
Still Images
Cropping Images before Printing
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1 Choose [Cropping].
Afterfollowingstep1in“ConguringPrint
Settings” (=
177) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
<m> button.
A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2 Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
To move the frame, press the
<o><p><q><r> buttons.
To rotate the frame, turn the <7> dial.
Whennished,pressthe<m> button.
3 Print the image.
Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (=
176)
to print.
• Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
• Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with
[Date Stamp
] selected.
178
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
1 Choose [Paper Settings].
Afterfollowingstep1in“ConguringPrint
Settings” (=
177) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the <m> button.
2 Choose a paper size.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
3 Choose a type of paper.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option, and then
press the <m> button.
4 Choose a layout.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an option.
When choosing [N-up], press the
<q><r> buttons to specify the number of
images per sheet.
Press the <m> button.
5 Print the image.
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Printsimagesforidenticationpurposes.
Only available for images with a resolution of L and an aspect ratio of
4:3.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
179
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Printing ID Photos
1 Choose [ID Photo].
Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(=
178), choose [ID Photo] and press
the <m> button.
2 Choose the long and short side
length.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an item. Choose the
length by pressing the <q><r> buttons,
and then press the <m> button.
3 Choose the printing area.
Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (=
177) to choose the printing
area.
4 Print the image.
Movies
Printing Movie Scenes
1 Access the printing screen.
Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(=
176) to choose a movie. The screen
at left is displayed.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [c], and then press
the <m> button. The screen at left is
displayed.
2 Choose a printing method.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn
the <7> dial to choose [
], and then
press the <q><r> buttons to choose the
printing method.
3 Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single sheet of
paper.Youcanalsoprintthefoldernumber,lenumber,andelapsed
time for the frame by setting [Caption] to [On].
• To cancel printing in progress, press the <m> button.
• [IDPhoto]and[Sequence]cannotbechosenonCanon-brandPictBridge-
compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier models.
180
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Batch printing (=
182) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memorycardandcongurerelevantsettings,suchasthenumberofcopies,
as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform to
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
• RAW images cannot be included in print list.
Still Images
ConguringPrintSettings
Specifytheprintingformat,whethertoaddthedateorlenumber,and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.
Press the <n> button, and then
choose [Print Settings] on the [2] tab.
Chooseandcongureitemsasdesired
(=
25).
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index Smaller versions of multiple images are printed per sheet.
Both Both standard and index formats are printed.
Date
On Images are printed with the shooting date.
Off
–
File No.
On Imagesareprintedwiththelenumber.
Off
–
Clear DPOF
data
On All image print list settings are cleared after printing.
Off
–
• Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
• [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory
cardhasprintsettingsthatwereconguredonanothercamera.
Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all
previous settings.
• Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date
twice.
• Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both [Date] and [File
No.] at the same time.
• Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible
printers (sold separately).
• The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/Time] on the
[3] tab (=
14).
181
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
Press the <n> button, choose
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [2] tab,
and then press the <m> button.
2 Choose an image.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
You can now specify the number of
copies.
If you specify index printing for the image,
it is labeled with a [
] icon. To cancel
index printing for the image, press the
<m> button again. [
] is no longer
displayed.
3 Specify the number of prints.
Press the <o><p> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to specify the number of prints
(up to 99).
To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
Printingquantitycannotbespeciedfor
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
Whennished,pressthe<n> button
to return to the menu screen.
Still Images
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (=
181), choose
[Select Range] and press the <m>
button.
Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(=
112) to specify images.
Press the <o><p> buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the <m> button.
Still Images
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (=
181), choose
[Select All Images] and press the <m>
button.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
182
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Clearing All Images from the Print List
Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (=
181), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the <m>
button.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Still Images
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
When images have been added to the
print list (=
180 – 181), the screen
at left is displayed after you connect
the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer. Press the <o><p> buttons to
choose [Print now], and then simply press
the <m> button to print the images in the
print list.
Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
Still Images
Adding Images to a Photobook
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when ordering
printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
Press the <n> button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [1] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
• [
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory
cardhasprintsettingsthatwereconguredonanothercamera.
Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all
previous settings.
• After importing images to your computer, also refer to “Software Instruction
Manual” (=
173) and the printer manual for further information.
183
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Still Images
Adding Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
182), choose
[Select] and press the <m> button.
2 Choose an image.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose an image, and then
press the <m> button.
[ ] is displayed.
To remove the image from the photobook,
press the <m> button again. [
] is no
longer displayed.
Repeat this process to specify other
images.
Whennished,pressthe<n> button
to return to the menu screen.
Still Images
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
182), choose
[Select All Images] and press the <m>
button.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
Still Images
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
182), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the <m>
button.
Press the <q><r> buttons or turn the
<7> dial to choose [OK], and then press
the <m> button.
184
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
10
Troubleshooting .............................................185
On-Screen Messages .....................................188
On-Screen Information .................................. 191
Shooting (Information Display) ............................191
Playback (Detailed Information Display) .............192
Functions and Menu Tables .......................... 193
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ....... 193
FUNC. Menu .......................................................195
4 Shooting Tab Menu........................................198
3 Set Up Tab Menu ...........................................202
My Menu Tab Menu ....................................... 202
1 Playback Tab Menu .......................................202
2 Print Tab Menu ...............................................202
Handling Precautions .................................... 203
Specications .................................................203
185
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Troubleshooting
Ifyouthinkthereisaproblemwiththecamera,rstcheckthefollowing.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
• Conrmthatthebatterypackischarged(=
12).
• Conrmthatthebatterypackisinsertedfacingthecorrectway(=
13).
• Conrmthatthememorycard/batterycoverisfullyclosed(=
14).
• Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a
cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
• Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery pack a
little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals do not touch
any metal objects.
• If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon after
charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
• Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the cover,
turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (=
14).
The battery pack is swollen.
• Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
batteryswellingpreventsthebatterypackfromttinginthecamera,contactaCanon
Customer Support Help Desk.
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (=
165).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
• In Playback mode (=
101), press the shutter button halfway (=
22).
Nothing is displayed (=
32).
Strange display on the screen under low light (=
23).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
• ThescreenmayickerandhorizontalbandingmayappearunderuorescentorLED
lighting.
No date stamp is added to images.
• Congurethe[DateStamp ] setting (=
38). Note that date stamps are not
addedtoimagesautomatically,merelybecauseyouhaveconguredthe[Date/Time]
setting (=
14).
• Date stamps are not added in shooting modes (=
201) in which this setting cannot
becongured(=
38).
[h]ashesonthescreenwhentheshutterbuttonispressed,and
shooting is not possible (=
32).
[ ] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (=
32).
• Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (=
89).
• Raisetheashandsettheashmodeto[h] (=
85).
• Increase the ISO speed (=
70).
• Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this case, you
should set [IS Mode] to [Off] (=
89).
Shots are out of focus.
• Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way
down to shoot (=
22).
• Make sure subjects are within focusing range (=
205).
• Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (=
48).
• Conrmthatunneededfunctionssuchasmacroaredeactivated.
• Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (=
81, 85).
186
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
• To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button
halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
Subjects in shots look too dark.
• Raisetheashandsettheashmodeto[h] (=
85).
• Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=
68).
• Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (=
72, 120).
• Use AE lock or spot metering (=
69).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
• Lowertheashandsettheashmodeto[!] (=
29).
• Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=
68).
• Use AE lock or spot metering (=
69).
• Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shotslooktoodarkdespitetheashring(=
32).
• Shootwithinashrange(=
205).
• Adjustbrightnessbyusingashexposurecompensationorchangingtheashoutput
level (=
86, 94).
• Increase the ISO speed (=
70).
Subjectsinashshotslooktoobright,highlightsarewashed-out.
• Shootwithinashrange(=
205).
• Lowertheashandsettheashmodeto[!] (=
29).
• Adjustbrightnessbyusingashexposurecompensationorchangingtheashoutput
level (=
86, 94).
Whitedotsorsimilarimageartifactsappearinashshots.
• Thisiscausedbylightfromtheashreectingoffdustorairborneparticles.
Shots look grainy.
• Lower the ISO speed (=
70).
• High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (=
53).
Subjects are affected by red-eye (=
45).
• Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (=
49) to activate the red-eye reduction lamp
(=
3)inashshots.Forbestresults,havesubjectslookatthered-eyereduction
lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range.
• Edit images using red-eye correction (=
121).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting
is slower.
• Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=
154).
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
• Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in Each
Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab Menu” (=
193 – 201).
The Babies or Children icon does not display.
• The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face
information (=
39). If the icons still do not display even when you set the birthday,
re-register face information (=
39), or make sure that the date/time are set
correctly (=
151).
Cannot shoot planetarium stars well in [ ] mode.
• Shoot actual starry skies instead.
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
• Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports high-
speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the length
of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time (=
153,
205).
[ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
Thecamera’sinternalmemorybufferlledupasthecameracouldnotrecordtothe
memorycardquicklyenough.Tryoneofthefollowingmeasures.
• Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=
154).
• Lowertheimagequality(=
46).
• Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (=
205).
187
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Zooming is not possible.
• Zooming is not possible in [ ] mode (=
62).
• Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [
] (=
57) and [ ] (=
66)
modes.
Subjects look distorted.
• Subjectsthatpassinfrontofthecameraquicklymaylookdistorted.Thisisnota
malfunction.
Playback
Playback is not possible.
• Imageormovieplaybackmaynotbepossibleifacomputerisusedtorenamelesor
alter the folder structure. Refer to “Software Instruction Manual” (=
173) for details
onfolderstructureandlenames.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
• Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (=
154).
• There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that
have slow read speeds.
• When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may skip
ifcomputerperformanceisinadequate.
Sound is not played during movies.
• Adjust the volume (=
102) if you have activated [Mute] (=
150) or the sound in
the movie is faint.
• No sound is played for movies shot in [
] (=
57), [ ] (=
63), or [ ] (=
66)
mode because audio is not recorded in these modes.
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
• Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (=
21).
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
• Press the <1> button to enter Playback mode. Hold the <n> button down as
you press the <o> and <
m
> buttons at the same time. On the next screen, press
the <q><r> buttons to choose [B], and then press the <m> button.
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the < > button.
• The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and try
again.
• TheWi-Fimenucannotbeaccessedduringgroupplaybackorlteredimagedisplay
accordingtospeciedconditions.Cancelgrouporlteredimageplayback.
• The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Cannot add a device/destination.
• A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneededconnectioninformationfromthecamerarst,andthenaddnewdevices/
destinations (=
147).
• Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (=
127).
• Toaddasmartphone,rstinstallthededicatedapplicationCameraWindowonyour
smartphone (
=
130
).
• Toaddacomputer,rstinstalltheCameraWindowapplicationonyourcomputer.Also
check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (=
131, 133, 134).
• Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave
ovens,Bluetoothdevices,orotherequipmentoperatingonthe2.4GHzband.
• Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
• Conrmthattheaccesspointchannelissettoachannelsupportedbythecamera
(=
204). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to specify a
supported channel manually.
188
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Cannot send images.
• Thedestinationdevicehasinsufcientstoragespace.Increasethestoragespaceon
the destination device and resend the images.
• The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the
locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
• RAW images cannot be sent. In [
] mode, only the JPEG images are sent.
• Images cannot be sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
moveorrenameimagelesorfoldersonthecomputerthatreceivedimagessent
using Image Sync via an access point (=
145). Before moving or renaming these
imagelesorfoldersonthecomputer,makesuretheimageshavealreadybeensent
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Cannot resize images for sending.
• Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original size.
• Movies cannot be resized.
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
• Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [ ] or [ ]
to reduce sending time (=
142).
• Movies may take a long time to send.
• Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave
ovens,Bluetoothdevices,orotherequipmentoperatingonthe2.4GHzband.Note
that images may take a long time to send even when [
] is displayed.
• Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
• When sending images to a computer from a memory card with a large amount
of images (approximately 1,000), the connection may be disrupted. Import any
necessary images to a computer, and then reduce the number of images on the
memory card by erasing unnecessary images.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
• Reset the Wi-Fi settings (=
148).
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
No memory card
• The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory card
facing the correct way (=
13).
Memory card locked
• The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the
write-protect tab to the unlocked position (=
13).
Cannot record!
• Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (=
13).
Memory card error (=
154)
• If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a supported
memory card (=
2) and have inserted it facing the correct way (=
13), contact
a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufcientspaceoncard
•
There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (
=
29, 51, 67, 91)
or edit images (
=
118 – 121). Either erase unneeded images (
=
114) or insert a
memory card with enough free space (
=
13).
Charge the battery (=
12)
No Image.
• The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (=
111)
UnidentiedImage/IncompatibleJPEG/Imagetoolarge./Cannotplay
back MOV
• Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
• It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer,
or images shot with another camera.
189
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Cannotmagnify!/CannotplaybackthiscontentinSmartShufe/
Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to
category/Unselectableimage./Noidenticationinformation
• The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already
edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that starred (*)
functions are not available for movies.
Edit ID Info* (=
108 – 109), Magnify* (=
109),SmartShufe*(=
110), Rotate
(=
116), Favorites (=
117), Edit* (=
118 – 121), Print List* (=
180), and
Photobook Set-up* (=
182).
• Grouped images cannot be processed (=
77).
Invalid selection range
• When specifying a range for image selection (=
112, 115, 181), you attempted to
chooseaninitialimagethatwasafterthenalimage,orvice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
• More than 998 images were selected for Print List (=
180) or Photobook Set-up
(=
182). Choose 998 images or less.
• Print List (=
180) or Photobook Set-up (=
182) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
• You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (=
111), Erase
(=
114), Favorites (=
117), Print List (=
180), or Photobook Set-up (=
182).
Communication error
• An excessive amount of images (approx. 1,000) on the memory card prevented
printing or image transfer to a computer. To transfer the images, use a commercially
available USB card reader. To print, insert the memory card directly into the printer
card slot.
Naming error!
• The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the highest
supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been reached and
the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders has been reached.
On the [3] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset] (=
154), or format the
memory card (=
153).
Lens Error
• This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is used
in dusty or sandy locations.
• Frequentdisplayofthiserrormessagemayindicatecameradamage.Inthiscase,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
A camera error was detected (error number)
• If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not have
been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
• Frequentdisplayofthiserrormessagemayindicatecameradamage.Inthiscase,
write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
File Error
• Correct printing (=
176) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
• Check the paper size setting (=
178). If this error message is displayed when the
setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again.
Ink absorber full
• ContactaCanonCustomerSupportHelpDesktorequestassistancewithink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
• No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (=
134).
• A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
• Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
• The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
190
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
No access points found
• Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
• When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
• Check the access point security settings (=
134).
IPaddressconict
• ResettheIPaddresssothatitdoesnotconictwithanother.
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
• You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
• Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices,
and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
• Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the
access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
• Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Sending failed
Memory card error
• If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Receiving failed
Insufcientspaceoncard
• There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to receive
images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a memory card
withsufcientspace.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
• The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
• When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999) have
been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insufcientspaceonserver
• Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create space.
• Save the images sent via Image Sync (=
145) to your computer.
Check network settings
• Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
191
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
Shooting mode
(=
193), Scene
icon (=
33)
Flash mode
(=
85), LED light
(=
169)
Red-eye correction
(=
45)
Flash exposure
compensation /
Flash output level
(=
86, 94)
Metering method
(=
69),NDlter
(=
73), Shadow
correction (=
73)
Drive mode
(=
76), AEB
shooting (=
72),
Focus bracketing
(=
80)
White balance
(=
74), Mercury
lamp correction
(=
46)
My Colors (=
75)
Eco mode (=
152)
Camera shake
warning (=
32)
Self-timer (=
36)
IS mode icon
(=
34)
Battery level
(=
191)
Still image
compression
(=
89),
Resolution (=
45)
Recordable shots
(=
204)
Movie resolution
(=
46)
Digital zoom
magnication
(=
35), Digital
tele-converter
(=
80)
Remaining time
(=
205)
Histogram (=
103)
Focusing range
(= 53, 78),
Manual focus (= 78),
AF lock (= 85)
Blink detection
(=
48)
AF frame (=
81),
Spot AE point frame
(=
69)
Date stamp
(=
38)
DR correction
(=
73)
AE lock (=
69),
FE lock (=
87)
Shutter speed
(=
92, 93)
Electronic level
(=
47)
Aperture value
(=
93)
Exposure
compensation level
(=
68)
ISO speed (=
70)
Grid lines (=
95)
Hybrid Auto mode
(=
31)
Zoom bar (=
29)
Windlter(=
32)
Time zone (=
151)
Image stabilization
(=
89)
MF indicator
(=
78)
Exposure shift bar
(=
65)
Exposure level
(=
93)
Exposure
compensation bar
(=
68)
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sufcientcharge
Slightlydepleted,butsufcient
(Blinking red)
Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon
[Charge the battery] Depleted—charge the battery pack immediately
192
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
Movies (
=
29
,
102
)
Current image no. /
Total no. of images
Histogram (=
103)
Battery level
(=
191)
Wi-Fi signal strength
(=
142)
Image Sync (=
145)
Image editing
(=
118 – 121),
Movie compression
(=
123)
Favorites (=
117)
Protection (=
111)
Folder number - File
number (=
154)
Shooting date/time
(=
14)
Shooting mode
(=
193)
Shutter speed
(= 92, 93)
Aperture value
(=
93)
Exposure
compensation level
(=
68), Exposure
shift level (=
65)
ISO speed (=
70),
Playback speed
(=
57)
Metering method
(=
69
)
Flash output
level (=
94),
Flash exposure
compensation
(=
86)
White balance
(=
74)
White balance
correction (=
74),
Mercury lamp
correction (=
46)
My Colors (=
75,
120)
Focusing range
(
=
53
, 78),
Manual focus
(=
78)
NDlter(=
73)
Red-eye correction
(=
45, 121)
High ISO NR
(=
71)
DR correction
(=
73)
Shadow correction
(=
73)
Group playback
(= 108),Imagequality
/ Frame rate (movies)
(= 46, 66)
Compression (image
quality)(=
89)
/ Resolution
(=
45), Digest
movies (=
104),
RAW (=
88),
MP4 (movies)
Still images:
Resolution (=
204)
Movies: Playback
time (=
205)
File size
• Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV
(=
163).
Summary of Movie Control Panel in “Viewing” (=
102)
Exit
Play
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the <q><r> buttons or turn
the <7> dial. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (=
123) (To continue skipping backward,
keep holding down the <m> button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the <m> button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the <m> button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (=
123) (To continue skipping forward, keep
holding down the <m> button.)
* Edit (=
122)
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected (=
123))
c
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer
(=
176).
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
• During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the previous or
next clip) by pressing the <q><r> buttons.
193
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
D B M G
K E
I
S P t E
Exposure Compensation (=
68)
*
1
*
1
–
O O O
– –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
ISO Speed (=
70)
AUTO *
1
*
1
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
80 – 12800 *
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Flash (=
85)
*
1
*
1
– – –
O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O
– –
O O O O
–
O O O O
– –
h
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O O O O
– – –
O O O
– –
O O O O
–
O O O O
– –
Z
*
1
*
1
–
O
–
O
*
2
*
2
– – – – – – –
*
2
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
!
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Shutter Speed (=
92, 93)
*
1
*
1
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Aperture Value (=
93)
*
1
*
1
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Program Shift (=
69)
O O
–
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
AE Lock (=
69)/FE Lock (=
87)*
3
O O
–
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
AE Lock (Movie)/Exposure Shift (=
65)*
4
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
AF Lock (when assigned to the <
> or movie button)
(=
85)
O O O O O O
– –
O
– – –
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O
Focusing Range (=
53, 78)
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
e
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O
– – – – – –
O
–
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O
8
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Manual Focus (=
78)
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O
– – –
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Not available, but switches to [Z] in some cases.
*3 FE lock not available in [!]ashmode.
*4 In modes other than [E], AE lock and Exposure shift are only available when
shooting movies.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
194
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
D B M G
K E
I
S P t E
Move AF Frame (=
81)
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – –
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Resize AF Frame (=
81)
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O
– – – – – – –
O O
– –
O
– –
O
–
O O O O O O
Face Select (=
84)
O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – –
O
–
O O
– –
O O O O O O O O
Set Tracking AF Subject (=
82)
O O O O O O
–
O O
– – – – – – –
O O
– –
O
– – – – –
O O O O
–
Screen Display (=
23)
Display Off *
1
*
1
O O O O
–
O O
– – –
O O O
– –
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – –
Display 1 *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Display 2 *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
195
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
FUNC. Menu
Shooting Mode
Function
D B M G
K E
I
S P t E
DR Correction (=
73)
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
*
1
*
1
–
O O O O O
– – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Shadow Correct (=
73)
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
White Balance (=
74)
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
S
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– – –
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
h
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– – –
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*
2
*
2
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– – –
O O O
– – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
White Balance Correction (=
74)
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – –
*
2
*
2
*
2
–
*
2
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
My Colors (=
75)
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*
3
*
3
*
4
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– – –
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Bracketing (=
72, 80)
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*
1
*
1
–
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Advanced settings not available.
*3 White balance is not available.
*4 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and
skin tone.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
196
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
D B M G
K E
I
S P t E
Drive Mode (=
76)
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*
2
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O
– – – – – – –
O O O
–
O O O O
–
O O O O
– –
*
2
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – –
O O O
–
O O O O
–
O O O O
– –
Self-Timer (=
36)
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
] [ $
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Self-Timer Settings (=
37)
Delay*
3
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Shots*
4
*
1
*
1
O O O O
–
O O
– – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
Flash Exposure Compensation (=
86)
*
1
*
1
–
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Flash Output Level (=
94)
*
1
*
1
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Metering Method (=
69)
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
ND Filter (=
73)
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Still Image Aspect Ratio (=
44)
*
1
*
1
O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
– – –
O
– – –
O O O
– –
*
1
*
1
O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
– –
O O O
– – – – – – –
O O O
– –
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*
1
*
1
O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
– –
O O O
– – – – – – –
O O O
– –
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 [
] is set with [f], AF lock, or [t].
*3 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*4Oneshot(cannotbemodied)inmodeswithoutselectionofthenumberofshots.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
197
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
D B M G
K E
I
S P t E
Image Type (=
88)
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Resolution (=
45)
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*
1
*
1
O O O O
–
O O O O O
– – – –
O O O
– – – – – – – – – –
O O
Compression (=
89)
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Movie Quality (=
46, 66)
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
*
2
O O O O O O O
–
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (=
57).
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
198
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
4 Shooting Tab Menu
Shooting Mode
Function
D B M G
K E
I
S P t E
AF Frame (=
81)
Face AiAF *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O
–
O
–
O O
– –
O O O O O O O O
Tracking AF *
1
*
1
O O O O
–
*
2
O
– – – – – – –
O O
– –
O
– – – – –
O O O O
–
FlexiZone/Center*
3
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O
– – –
O O O
–
O O O
–
O O
–
O
–
O O O O O O
Digital Zoom (=
35)
Standard *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
O O O
– – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Off *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
1.5/2.0x *
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
AF-Point Zoom (=
47)
On *
1
*
1
O O O O
–
O O O O O
– – – –
O O
– –
O
– – – – –
O O O
– –
Off *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Servo AF (=
83)
On *
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O
– – – – – – –
O O
– –
O
– – – – –
O O O
– –
Off *
1
*
1
O O O O O
*
4
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Continuous AF (=
84)
On *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O
Off *
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
AF-assist Beam (=
48)
On *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O
–
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O
Off *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
MF-Point Zoom (=
79)
Off *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
2x/4x *
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O
– – –
O O O
–
O O
– –
O
– – – – –
O O O
– –
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Only available by pressing the <o> button (=
38).
*3 [FlexiZone] in [G], [M], [B], and [D] modes, otherwise [Center].
*4 [On] when subject movement is detected.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
199
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
D B M G
K E
I
S P t E
Safety MF (=
79)
On *
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O
– – –
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O
Off *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
MF Peaking Settings (=
79)
Peaking On/Off *
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O
– – –
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O
Level High/Low *
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O
– – –
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O
Color Red/Blue/Yellow *
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O
– – –
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O
Flash Control (=
45, 49, 86, 87, 94)
Flash Mode
Auto *
1
*
1
–
O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O
– –
O O O O
–
O O O O
– –
Manual *
1
*
1
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Flash Exp. Comp *
1
*
1
–
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Flash Output *
1
*
1
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Shutter Sync.
1st-curtain *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O
– –
O O O O
–
O O O O
– –
2nd-curtain *
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Red-Eye Corr.
On *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
Off *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O
– –
O O O O
–
O O O O
– –
Red-Eye Lamp On/Off *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O
–
O
– –
O O O O
–
O O O O
– –
Safety FE
On *
1
*
1
–
O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O
– –
O O O O
–
O O O O
– –
Off *
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
ISO Auto Settings (=
71)
Max ISO Speed *
1
*
1
–
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Rate of Change *
1
*
1
–
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
High ISO NR (=
71)
Low/Standard/High *
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Hg Lamp Corr. (=
46)
On/Off
– – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Spot AE Point (=
69)
Center/AF Point *
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
200
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
D B M G
K E
I
S P t E
Safety Shift (=
93)
On *
1
*
1
–
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Off *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Wind Filter (=
32)
Auto/Off *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
Review image after shooting (=
49)
Display Time
Off/Quick *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec. *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
Hold *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
Display Info Off/Detailed *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
Blink Detection (=
48)
On *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – –
O
– –
O
– – – – – –
O O
– –
Off *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Custom Display (=
95)
Shooting Info/Grid Lines/Electronic Level/Histogram *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Night Display (=
90)
On/Off *
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – –
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
FUNC. Menu Layout (=
98)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
IS Settings (=
89)
IS Mode
Off *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Continuous *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Shoot Only *
1
*
1
O O O O
– –
O O O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
Dynamic IS
1 *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
2 *
1
*
1
O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
201
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
D B M G
K E
I
S P t E
Converter (=
166)
None/TC-DC58E *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Date Stamp (=
38)
Off *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Date/Date & Time *
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – –
Digest Type (=
31)
Include Stills/No Stills
– – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Save
Stills (=
64)
On/Off
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Star Emphasis (=
62)
On/Off
– – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Face ID Settings (=
39)
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Set z7 Func. (=
96)
*
1
*
1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Set Shortcut button (=
97)
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Set button (=
97)
*
1
*
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
Save Settings (=
99)
O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
- Names of people in shots taken using Face ID (=
39) may not be displayed in
some modes or with some settings, but they will be recorded in the still images.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
202
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
1 Playback Tab Menu
Item Ref. Page Item Ref. Page
List/Play Digest Movies
=
105
Resize
=
118
SmartShufe
=
110
My Colors
=
120
Slideshow
=
110
Face ID Info
=
105
Erase
=
114
Transition Effect
=
103
Protect
=
111
Index Effect
=
105
Rotate
=
116
Scroll Display
=
103
Favorites
=
117
Group Images
=
108
Photobook Set-up
=
182
Auto Rotate
=
116
i-Contrast
=
120
Resume
=
103
Red-Eye Correction
=
121
Set Shortcut button
=
118
Cropping
=
119
2 Print Tab Menu
Item Ref. Page Item Ref. Page
Print
–
Select All Images
=
181
Select Images & Qty.
=
181
Clear All Selections
=
182
Select Range
=
181
Print Settings
=
180
3 Set Up Tab Menu
Item Ref. Page
Item Ref. Page
Mute
=
150
File Numbering
=
154
Volume
=
150
Create Folder
=
155
Sound Options
=
150
Units
=
155
Hints & Tips
=
151
Electronic Level
=
155
Date/Time
=
14
Video System
=
165
Time Zone
=
151
Ctrl via HDMI
=
164
Lens Retract
=
152
Wi-Fi Settings
=
124
Eco Mode
=
152
Copyright Info
=
156
Power Saving
=
21, 152
CerticationLogoDisplay
=
156
LCD Brightness
=
153
Language
=
16
Start-up Image
=
153
Reset All
=
157
Format
=
153, 154
My Menu Tab Menu
Item Ref. Page
My Menu settings
=
100
203
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Specications
Camera Effective
Pixels (Max.)
Approx. 12.1 million pixels
Lens Focal Length
5x zoom: 6.1 (W) – 30.5 (T) mm
(35mmlmequivalent:28(W)–140(T)mm)
Viewnder
Real-imagetypeopticalzoomviewnder
Dioptric Adjustment Range: –3.0 to +1.0 m
-1
(dpt)
Coverage: Approx. 80%
LCD Monitor
3.0-type color TFT LCD
Effective Pixels: Approx. 922,000 dots
File Format
Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version 1.1)
compliant
Data Type
Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG), RAW (CR2 (Canon Original))
Movies: MP4 (Video: H.264; Audio: MPEG2 AAC-LC (stereo))
Interface
Hi-speed USB
HDMI output
Analog audio output (stereo)
Analog video output (NTSC/PAL)
Power Source
Battery Pack NB-10L
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80
Dimensions (Based
on CIPA Guidelines)
108.8 x 75.9 x 40.3 mm (4.28 x 2.99 x 1.59 in.)
Weight (Based on
CIPA Guidelines)
Approx. 356 g (approx. 12.56 oz.; including the battery pack
and memory card)
Approx. 314 g (approx. 11.08 oz.; camera body only)
Handling Precautions
• The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
• Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generatestrongelectromagneticelds,whichmaycausemalfunctionor
erase image data.
• If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry
soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force.
• Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera or
screen.
• Useablowerbrushtoremovedustfromthelens.Ifcleaningisdifcult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
• To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to warm
environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and
let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag.
• If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
• Before long-term battery storage, use up the battery pack’s remaining
charge, remove it from the camera, and store it in a plastic bag or similar
container. Storing a partially charged battery pack over extended periods
(about a year) may shorten its life or affect performance.
204
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Number of 4:3 Shots per Memory Card
Recording Pixels
Compression
Ratio
Number of Shots per Memory Card
(Approx. shots)
8 GB 32 GB
(Large)
12M/4000x3000
1379 5568
2192 8850
(Medium 1)
6M/2816x2112
2431 9814
3721 15020
(Medium 2)
2M/1600x1200
7442 30040
12927 52176
(Small)
0.3M/640x480
27291 110150
40937 165225
RAW Images
4000x3000
– 446 1804
•The values in the table are measured according to Canon standards and may change
depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.
•The values in the table are based on 4:3 aspect ratio. If the aspect ratio is changed
(=
44), more images can be shot because the data size per image will be smaller
than with 4:3 images. However, since [
] 16:9 images have a setting of 1920 x 1080
pixels, their data size will be larger than 4:3 images.
Wi-Fi Functions
Standards
IEEE802.11b/g/n*
*2.4 GHz band only
Transmission
Methods
OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)
DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b)
Communication
Modes
Infrastructure mode*
1
, Ad hoc mode*
2
*1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup
*2Wi-FiCertiedIBSS
Supported Channels
1 – 11 (PC2035/PC2059) or 1 – 13 (PC2010)
Model numbers indicated in parentheses (=
210)
Security
WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Shots
Screen On Approx. 360
Screen Off Approx. 770
Eco Mode On Approx. 480
Movie Recording
Time*
1
Screen On Approx. 1 hour
Continuous
Shooting*
2
Screen On Approx. 1 hour, 40 minutes
Playback Time Approx. 7 hours
*1 Time under default camera settings, when normal operations are performed, such as
shooting, pausing, turning the camera on and off, and zooming.
*2 Time available when shooting the maximum movie length (until recording stops
automatically) repeatedly.
•The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement guidelines of the
Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
•Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording time may be less
than mentioned above.
•Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
205
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Shooting Range
Shooting Mode Focusing Range
Maximum Wide Angle
(j)
Maximum Telephoto
(i)
–
1cm–innity
(0.4in.–innity)
40cm–innity
(1.3ft.–innity)
Other modes
5cm–innity
(2.0in.–innity)
40cm–innity
(1.3ft.–innity)
e*
1 – 50 cm
(0.4 in. – 1.6 ft.)
–
f*
1cm–innity
(0.4in.–innity)
40cm–innity
(1.3ft.–innity)
1 – 50 cm
(0.4 in. – 1.6 ft.)
–
8
1.5 – 20 m
(4.9 – 66 ft.)
1.5 – 20 m
(4.9 – 66 ft.)
* Not available in some shooting modes.
Continuous Shooting Speed
Continuous Shooting Mode Speed
W
Approx. 12.2 shots/sec.
Approx. 9.3 shots/sec.*
Approx. 5.7 shots/sec.
Approx. 5.9 shots/sec.
* From the sixth shot.
•Based on Canon testing standards, using a 8 GB UHS-I memory card. Note that the
number of shots will vary depending on subjects, the brand of memory card, and other
factors.
Recording Time per Memory Card
Image Quality
Recording Time per Memory Card
8 GB 32 GB
30 min. 03 sec. 2 hr. 01 min. 27 sec.
43 min. 29 sec. 2 hr. 55 min. 43 sec.
2 hr. 03 min. 55 sec. 8 hr. 20 min. 32 sec.
5 hr. 14 min. 34 sec. 21 hr. 10 min. 33 sec.
•The values in the table are measured according to Canon standards and may change
depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings.
•Recordingwillautomaticallystopwhenthecliplesizereaches4GB,orwhenthe
recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59 seconds when shooting in
[
], [ ] or [ ], or approximately 1 hour when shooting in [ ].
•Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been reached on some
memory cards. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended.
Flash Range
Maximum wide angle (j)
50 cm – 7.0 m (1.6 – 23 ft.)
Maximum telephoto (i)
50 cm – 4.5 m (1.6 – 15 ft.)
206
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz) 16 VA (100 V) – 22 VA (240 V),
0.18 A (100 V) – 0.12 A (240 V)
Rated Output: 8.4 V DC, 0.7 A
Charging Time: Approx. 1 hour 50 min. (when using NB-10L)
Charge Indicator: Charging: orange / Fully charged: green (two indicators)
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Tele-Converter TC-DC58E (Sold Separately)
Zoom Factor: 1.4x
Lens Construction: 5 elements in 3 groups
Thread Diameter: 58 mm*
Max.DiameterxLength: ɸ69.0x36.5mm(ɸ2.72x1.44in.)
Weight: Approx. 165 g (approx. 5.8 oz.)
* RequiresConversionLensAdapterLA-DC58L.
Conversion Lens Adapter LA-DC58L (Sold Separately)
Camera Mount: Bayonet
Thread Diameter: 58 mm
Max.DiameterxLength: ɸ63.8x54.8mm(ɸ2.51x2.16in.)
Weight: Approx. 36 g (approx. 1.3 oz.)
Filter Adapter FA-DC58D (Sold Separately)
Max.DiameterxLength: ɸ66.0x46.7mm(ɸ2.60x1.84in.)
Weight: Approx. 58 g (approx. 2.0 oz.)
Bracket BKT-DC1 (Sold Separately)
Dimensions (Max.): 220.0 x 32.0 x 19.0 mm (8.66 x 1.26 x 0.75 in.)
Weight: Approx. 90 g (approx. 3.2 oz.)
• All data is based on tests by Canon.
• Cameraspecicationsorappearancearesubjecttochangewithout
notice.
Shutter Speed
[ ] mode, automatically set range
1 – 1/4000 sec.
Available values in [M] or [D] mode
(sec.)*
250, 200, 160, 125, 100, 80, 60, 50, 40, 30, 25,
20, 15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1,
0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10,
1/13, 1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60,
1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320,
1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250,
1/1600, 1/2000, 1/2500, 1/3200, 1/4000
* In [M] mode, shutter speeds of 20 seconds or slower are not available.
Aperture
f/number f/1.8 – f/8.0 (W), f/2.8 – f/8.0 (T)
Available values in [B] mode*
f/1.8, f/2.0, f/2.2, f/2.5, f/2.8, f/3.2, f/3.5, f/4.0,
f/4.5, f/5.0, f/5.6, f/6.3, f/7.1, f/8.0
* Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available.
Battery Pack NB-10L
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Nominal Voltage: 7.4 V DC
Nominal Capacity: 920 mAh
Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Dimensions: 32.5 x 45.4 x 15.1 mm (1.28 x 1.79 x 0.59 in.)
Weight: Approx. 41 g (approx. 1.45 oz.)
207
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Slow synchro ................................. 85
FlexiZone (AF frame mode)................. 81
Focus bracketing ................................. 80
Focus check ...................................... 109
Focusing
AF frames ...................................... 81
AF lock .......................................... 85
AF-point zoom ............................... 47
Face select .................................... 84
MF peaking ................................... 79
Servo AF ....................................... 83
Focusing range
Macro ............................................ 78
Quick ............................................. 53
Underwater macro ......................... 53
Focus lock ........................................... 81
Front dial...................................... 96, 107
FUNC. menu
Basic operations ............................ 24
Table ............................................ 195
FUNC. menu layout ............................. 98
G
GPS information display .................... 103
H
Handheld nightscene
(shooting mode)................................... 52
HDMI cable ........................................ 162
High dynamic range
(shooting mode)................................... 55
Household power............................... 165
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) ............... 31
Index
A
AC adapter kit ............................ 160, 165
Accessories ....................................... 160
AEB shooting ....................................... 72
AE lock ................................................ 69
AF frames ............................................ 81
AF lock................................................. 85
Aspect ratio.......................................... 44
AUTO mode
(shooting mode)....................... 16, 23, 29
Av (shooting mode) ............................. 93
B
Background defocus
(shooting mode)................................... 58
Batteries
→
Date/time (date/time battery)
Battery charger .............................. 2, 160
Battery pack
Charging ........................................ 12
Eco mode .................................... 152
Level ............................................ 191
Power saving ................................. 21
Black and white images ....................... 75
Blink detection ..................................... 48
C
C1/C2 (shooting mode) ....................... 99
Camera
Reset all ...................................... 157
Camera access point mode ............... 139
Camera shake ..................................... 89
CameraWindow (computer)............... 131
CameraWindow (smartphone)........... 130
CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY ......................... 125, 127, 128
Center (AF frame mode)...................... 81
Clock.................................................... 27
Color (white balance)........................... 74
Compressionratio(imagequality) ....... 89
Connecting via an access point ......... 134
Connecting without an access point .. 139
Continuous shooting ............................ 76
Creativelters(shootingmode)........... 54
Cropping .....................................119, 177
Custom white balance ......................... 74
D
Date/time
Adding date stamps ...................... 38
Changing ....................................... 15
Date/time battery ........................... 15
Settings ......................................... 14
World clock .................................. 151
DC coupler......................................... 165
Defaults
→
Reset all
Digital tele-converter............................ 80
Digital zoom ......................................... 35
Display language ................................. 16
DPOF ................................................. 180
Drive mode .......................................... 76
Dynamic Range Correction ................. 73
E
Eco mode .......................................... 152
Editing
Cropping ....................................... 119
i-Contrast ..................................... 120
My Colors .................................... 120
Red-eye correction ...................... 121
Resizing images ...........................118
Editing or erasing connection
information ......................................... 147
Electronic level .................................... 47
Erasing ...............................................114
Error messages ................................. 188
Exposure
AE lock .......................................... 69
Compensation ............................... 68
FE lock .......................................... 87
F
Face AiAF (AF frame mode) ................ 82
Face ID ................................................ 39
Face select .......................................... 84
Face self-timer (shooting mode) .......... 61
Favorites ............................................. 117
FE lock................................................. 87
File numbering ................................... 154
Fireworks (shooting mode) .................. 53
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) .......... 56
Flash
Deactivatingash .......................... 86
Flash exposure compensation ...... 86
On ................................................. 85
208
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Soft focus (shooting mode).................. 59
Software
Installation ................................... 131
Saving images to a computer ...... 174
Sounds .............................................. 150
Star (shooting mode) ........................... 62
Star nightscape (shooting mode) .. 62
Star time-lapse movie (shooting
mode) ............................................ 63
Star trails (shooting mode) ............ 62
Stereo AV cable ................................. 165
Strap ................................................ 2, 12
Super slow motion movie
(movie mode)....................................... 66
Super vivid (shooting mode) ................ 54
T
Terminal ............................. 163, 165, 176
Toy camera effect (shooting mode) ..... 58
Tracking AF ................................... 38, 82
Traveling with the camera ................. 151
Troubleshooting ................................. 185
TV display .......................................... 163
Tv (shooting mode).............................. 92
U
Underwater macro (focusing range) .... 53
Underwater (shooting mode) ............... 52
V
Viewnder ............................................ 22
Viewing ................................................ 18
Image search .............................. 106
Resizing images .................................118
Resolution (image size) ....................... 45
Rotating ..............................................116
S
Saving images to a computer ............ 144
Screen
Display language ........................... 16
Icons .................................... 191, 192
Menu
→
FUNC. menu, Menu
Searching .......................................... 106
Self-timer ............................................. 36
2-second self-timer ........................ 37
Customizing the self-timer ............. 37
Face self-timer (shooting mode) ... 61
Wink self-timer (shooting mode) ... 60
Sending images ................................. 142
Sending images to a computer .......... 127
Sending images to another camera... 126
Sending images to a printer............... 127
Sending images to a smartphone ...... 126
Sending images to Web services ...... 126
Sepia tone images ............................... 75
Servo AF .............................................. 83
Shadow correct.................................... 73
Shooting
Shooting date/time
→
Date/time
Shooting information ............. 95, 191
Slideshow ...........................................110
SmartShufe ...................................... 110
Smart Shutter (shooting mode) ........... 60
Smile (shooting mode)......................... 60
Snow (shooting mode)......................... 52
Multi-area White Balance .................... 46
My Colors .................................... 75, 120
N
NDlter ................................................ 73
Neck strap
→
Strap
Nostalgic (shooting mode) ................... 56
P
Package contents .................................. 2
Photobook set-up .............................. 182
PictBridge .................................. 162, 176
Playback
→
Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) ...................... 52
Poster effect (shooting mode) ............. 55
Power ................................................ 160
→
AC adapter kit
→
Battery charger
→
Battery pack
Power saving ....................................... 21
Printing .............................................. 176
Program AE ......................................... 68
Protecting ...........................................111
P (shooting mode) ............................... 68
Q
Quick (focusing range) ........................ 53
R
RAW .................................................... 88
Red-eye correction ...................... 45, 121
Reset all............................................. 157
I
i-Contrast ..................................... 72, 120
Imagequality
→
Compression ratio
(imagequality)
Images
Display period ............................... 49
Erasing .........................................114
Playback
→
Viewing
Protecting ..................................... 111
Indicator ............................................... 27
ISO speed............................................ 70
L
Lamp.............................................. 48, 49
M
Macro (focusing range)........................ 78
Magnieddisplay ............................... 109
Manual focus ....................................... 78
Memory cards ........................................ 2
Recording time ............................ 205
Menu
Basic operations ............................ 25
Table ............................................ 193
Mercury lamp correction ...................... 46
Metering method.................................. 69
Miniature effect (shooting mode) ......... 57
Monochrome (shooting mode)............. 59
Movies
Editing ......................................... 122
Imagequality
(resolution/frame rate) ............. 46, 66
Recording time ............................ 205
M (shooting mode)............................... 93
209
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Index display ............................... 105
Magnieddisplay ........................ 109
Single-image display ..................... 18
Slideshow .....................................110
SmartShufe ...............................110
TV display ................................... 163
W
White balance (color)........................... 74
Wi-Fi
Connecting and sending
images ......................................... 126
Wi-Fi functions ................................... 124
Wi-Fi menu ........................................ 133
Wink self-timer (shooting mode) .......... 60
World clock ........................................ 151
Z
Zoom ....................................... 17, 29, 35
210
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that Canon
accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of
earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
• When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and reset
the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
• Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product
due to loss or theft of the product.
• Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other than
as described in this guide.
• Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
• The camera’s model number is PC2035/
PC2059/PC2010. To identify your model,
check the label on the bottom of the
camera for a number beginning with PC.
The built-in WLAN module model is written
below.
Country/Region of Purchase WLAN Module Model
U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan WM222
Other WM218
•
• Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removingthecerticationlabelsfromtheproduct
• According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations, export
permission (or service transaction permission) from the Japanese
government is necessary to export strategic resources or services
(including this product) outside Japan.
• Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to
or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
211
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
• Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to
covertheirtrackswheninltratingothersystems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS over IP
enables PictBridge connections in network environments,
and the camera is also compatible with this standard.
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
• This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio
waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as
possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time
as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
• Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the
results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown
networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or
using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure
to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to
connect to other unknown networks.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
• Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and
attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
212
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
FCC/IC Notice
Model: PC2035 (including WLAN Module Model WM222, FCC ID: AZD222)
Battery Charger CB-2LCE
Battery Charger CB-2LC
213
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
Trademarks and Licensing
• Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
• App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• HDMI,theHDMIlogoandHigh-DenitionMultimediaInterfaceare
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
• Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
• This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding
MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and
non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the
AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted
or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
FCC Notice
(Digital Camera, Model PC2035 systems)
•
•
•
•
214
Disclaimer
• Reprinting, transmitting, or storing in a retrieval system any part of this
guide without the permission of Canon is prohibited.
• Canon reserves the right to change the contents of this guide at any time
without prior notice.
• Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
• The above items notwithstanding, Canon accepts no liability for damages
due to mistaken operation of the products.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cover
Before Use
Common Camera
Operations
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting
Modes
Tv, Av, M, C1,
and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Basic Guide
P Mode
